manualshive.com logo in svg

Sharp Advanced MXM365N, User Manual, Page: 1132 / 1441

Share
Download
Sharp Advanced MXM365N User Manual Download Page 1132

D efault Color M ode Settings

Auto, Full Color, Grayscale, Mono2

D isable  Ch ang e of B/W  Sett ing in Auto Mode

Setting the "Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode" checkbox to 

 disables

black & white settings from the base screen when the color mode is set to Auto.

Initial File Form at S ett ing

You can set the initial file format to be saved in an external memory device.

File Type

PDF, PDF/A, TIFF, JPEG

*1

, Compact PDF

*2*5

, Compact PDF (Ultra Fine)

*2*5

, Compact

PDF/A

*4*5

, Compact PDF/A (Ultra Fine)

*4*5

, Encrypt PDF, Encrypt/Compact PDF

*3*5

,

Encrypt/Compact PDF (Ultra Fine)

*3*5

, XPS

*1 When [Black & White] is selected, the format is [TIFF].

*2 When [Black & White] is selected, the format is [PDF].

*3 When [Black & White] is selected, the format is [Encrypt PDF].

*4 When [Black & White] is selected, the format is [PDF/A].

*5 When the Scanner Function Expansion Kit is installed.

Black & W hite

Compression Mode: None, MH (G3), MMR (G4)

Col or/Gr ayscal e

Compression Ratio: Low, Medium, High, Emphasize Black Letter

Specif ied Pages per File

Generates a separate file for each scanned page when multiple pages are scanned.

If this setting is enabled, a number of pages per file can be specified.

Number of Pages

Any number of pages can be specified as the number of pages per file.

D efault Original  Image Type

Select the original type beforehand to enable scanning at a resolution suitable for the

Wh e n  [JPEG] is  sele c te d for the file type , [Spe c ified Page s per File ] c an n ot be  se le cted.

USER'S MANUAL | MX-M365N/MX-M465N/MX-M565N USER'S ...

http://siica.sharpusa.com/portals/0/downloads/Manuals/MX-M365N-M...

1132 of 1441

3/17/2016 7:14 AM

Summary of Contents for Advanced MXM365N

Page 1: ...ultifunctional system MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N PRINTING ALL CATEGORIES USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 2: ... hosts the Power button Power Save button indicator Home Screen button main power button and touch panel Use the touch panel to operate each of these functions OPERATION PANEL Right tray Set so that paper is output into this tray as required By setting originals received via fax or Internet fax to be output into this tray you can separate them from paper output from copying Finisher This staples p...

Page 3: ...hen a stand 500 2x500 3x500 500 2000 sheet paper drawer is installed Store paper in this tray LOADING PAPER INTO A TRAY Tray 3 when a stand 2x500 3x500 sheet paper drawer is installed Store paper in this tray LOADING PAPER INTO A TRAY Tray 4 when a stand 3x500 sheet paper drawer is installed Store paper in this tray LOADING PAPER INTO A TRAY Tray 5 when a large capacity paper tray is installed Sto...

Page 4: ...her saddle finisher large stacker or finisher large stacker PUNCH MODULE Finisher large stacker This staples paper A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper FINISHER LARGE STACKER Saddle finisher This staples and folds paper A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper SADDLE FINISHER USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpu...

Page 5: ... Optional USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 5 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 6: ...is cover to remove a misfeed Paper reversing section cover This unit is used for reversing paper when 2 sided printing is performed Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed Main power switch Use this switch to turn on the power for the machine When using the fax or Internet fax functions always keep this switch in the position TURNING ON THE POWER The fusing unit is hot Take care not to burn your...

Page 7: ...er Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed in tray 2 3 or 4 Paper tray right side cover Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 1 or 2 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually When loading paper larger than 8 1 2 x 11 R or A4R pull out the extension guide LOADING PAPER IN...

Page 8: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 8 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 9: ...hese guides help ensure that the original is scanned correctly Adjust the guides to the width of the original AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Document feeder tray Set the original in this tray 1 sided originals must be placed face up AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Original exit tray The original is discharged to this tray after scanning USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com ...

Page 10: ... USB 2 0 Hi Speed LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network Use a shielded LAN cable Service only connector Tap the name to make its details pop up This connector is for use only by service technicians Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the machine to malfunction Important note for service technicians The cable connected to the service ...

Page 11: ...used an extension phone can be connected to this jack Telephone line jack When the fax function of the machine is used the telephone line is connected to this jack USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 11 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 12: ... switch is switched on Blinks green while print data is being received TURNING ON THE POWER Power button Use this button to turn the machine s power on and off TURNING ON THE POWER Power Save button indicator Use this button to set the machine to Auto Power Shut Off Timer for energy saving Power Save button blinks when the machine is in Auto Power Shut Off Timer AUTO POWER SHUT OFF TIMER Home Scre...

Page 13: ... Risk of malfunctioning if you use with jewelry or other accessories You can change the angle of the touch panel Adjust the angle for ease of viewing by pushing the movable part of the touch panel to the left USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 13 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 14: ...0 sheet paper dra wer MX DE20 Additional paper trays Tray 2 can hold a maximu m of 500 sheets of paper Tray 3 can hold a maxi mum of 1150 sheets and Tray 4 can hold a maxi mum of 850 sheets Large capacity tray MX LC11 Additional tray A maximum of 3500 sheets of pa per can be loaded into the tray To install a stan d 500 2x500 3x500 500 2000 sheet paper dra wer is required Long paper feeding tray MX...

Page 15: ...her outp ut A finisher is required MX PNX5B This unit punches holes in copies and other outp ut A saddle finisher is required MX PNX6B This unit punches holes in copies and other outp ut A finisher large stacker or saddle finisher la rge stacker is required Barcode Font Kit MX PF10 Adds barcode fonts to the machine XPS expansion kit MX PUX1 This kit can be used as an XPS compatible printe r Please...

Page 16: ...OSA The number of licenses can be set from 1 to 100 Please consult your dealer for details Sharp OSA Network Scanner To ol 5 License Kit MX UN05A Sharp OSA Network Scanner To ol 10 License Kit MX UN10A Sharp OSA Network Scanner To ol 50 License Kit MX UN50A Sharp OSA Network Scanner To ol 100 License Kit MX UN1HA Web browsing expansion kit MX AM10 Internet access is enabled for viewing Web page s ...

Page 17: ... 14 8 1 2 x 13 8 1 2 x 13 1 2 8 1 2 x 13 2 5 8 1 2 x 11 R and 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 R sizes Lever Use this lever to move the finisher in order to remove a paper misfeed replace staples or remove a staple jam Punch waste box when a punch module is installed This stores punch waste discharged from punching Front cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed replace staples remove a staple jam or remove t...

Page 18: ...of staples a message will appear in the operation panel Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge Operation Replacing the cartridge A finisher cannot be installed simultaneously with a saddle finisher Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place as the output tray may move up and down USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica s...

Page 19: ... finisher until it stops Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case Pull the staple case out to the right Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 19 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 20: ...e staple case Push the staple case in until it clicks into place Slide the finisher back to the right Gently slide the finisher back to the right until it locks into its original position USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 20 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 21: ...fy that stapling takes place correctly Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 21 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 22: ...put is delivered to this tray The tray is slidable Extend the tray for printing on large size paper 12 x 18 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 A3W A3 and B4 sizes Top cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed Staple compiler This temporarily stacks paper to be stapled Front cover Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge or remove a staple jam Tap the name to make its details pop up USER S ...

Page 23: ...nstall a finisher large stacker as well as a stand 500 2x500 3x500 500 2000 sheet paper drawer Do not place heavy objects on the finisher large stacker or press down on the finisher large stacker A finisher large stacker cannot be installed simultaneously with a finisher saddle finisher or saddle finisher large stacker Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place a...

Page 24: ... then remove the staple cartridge Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place When staples remain the staple cartridge cannot be removed Do not remove the seal from the cartridge before inserting the cartridge into the case USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 24...

Page 25: ... staple case in until it clicks into place Close the front cover Make a test print or copy in staple sort mode to verify that stapling takes place correctly USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 25 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 26: ...ly stacks paper to be stapled Output tray Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray The tray is slidable Extend the tray for printing on large size paper 12 x 18 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 A3W A3 and B4 sizes Side cover Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge or remove a staple jam Saddle stitch tray Saddle stitched output is delivered to this tray Top cover Open this cover to...

Page 27: ...per drawer Do not place heavy objects on the saddle finisher or press down on the saddle finisher Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place as the tray may move up and down A saddle finisher cannot be installed simultaneously with a finisher finisher large stacker or saddle finisher large stacker USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpus...

Page 28: ... the staple cartridge Operation Replacing the staple cartridge finisher unit Replacing the staple cartridge saddle stitch unit Replacing the staple cartridge finisher unit Open the front cover A saddle finisher cannot be installed simultaneously with a finisher finisher large stacker or saddle finisher large stacker USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 ...

Page 29: ...il it stops Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case Pull the staple case out to the right Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 29 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 30: ...ase Push the staple case in until it clicks into place Push the saddle finisher back and latch it to the machine Gently slide the finisher back to the right until it locks into its original position USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 30 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 31: ...tput tray of the saddle finisher Do not replace removed output back in the output tray Open the side cover Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 31 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 32: ...le cartridges Remove the cover from each staple cartridge and then install the cartridge Close the side cover USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 32 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 33: ...e size paper 12 x 18 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 A3W A3 and B4 sizes Saddle stitch tray guide This guides the output as it is delivered to the tray Before printing attach the saddle stitch tray guide in the appropriate position below for the paper size to be used Staple compiler This temporarily stacks paper to be stapled Saddle stitch tray This guides the output as it is delivered to the tray B...

Page 34: ...ell as a stand 500 2x500 3x500 500 2000 sheet paper drawer Do not place heavy objects on the saddle finisher large stacker or press down on the saddle finisher large stacker Exercise caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place as the tray may move up and down A saddle finisher large stacker cannot be installed simultaneously with a finisher finisher large stacker or saddle...

Page 35: ...addle stitch unit Replacing the staple cartridge finisher unit Open the front cover Squeeze the green parts of the staple case and pull the case up and then out Remove the empty staple cartridge Press the lock button to release the staple case cover and then remove the staple cartridge When staples remain the staple cartridge cannot be removed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http s...

Page 36: ...traight out Push the staple case firmly back in Push the staple case in until it clicks into place Close the front cover Do not remove the seal from the cartridge before inserting the cartridge into the case USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 36 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 37: ...tray Open the front cover Grasp the handle on the saddle stitch unit and pull it slowly out until it stops Pull the staple unit in the saddle stitch unit out and then rotate it up Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 37 of 1441 3 17 2016 ...

Page 38: ...each staple cartridge and then install the cartridge Pull the staple unit of the saddle finisher forward and then rotate it back to its original position Push the saddle stitch unit in Close the front cover of the saddle finisher USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 38 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 39: ...copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 39 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 40: ...w the operation procedure to replace punch waste Operation Finisher installed Finisher large stacker installed Saddle finisher installed Saddle finisher large stacker installed Finisher installed Open the cover While pressing the lever over to the left slide the finisher to the USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 40 of 1441...

Page 41: ...out the box and discard the punch waste Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container taking care not to let the waste scatter Gently push the box back in USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 41 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 42: ... it stops Gently slide the finisher until it stops Close the cover Finisher large stacker installed Open the front cover of the punch module USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 42 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 43: ...t to let the waste scatter Replace the punch waste box If the punch waste box is not replaced properly printing will not be possible using the punch function Close the cover of the punch module USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 43 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 44: ...rd the punch waste Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container taking care not to let the waste scatter Replace the punch waste box USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 44 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 45: ...ule Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container taking care not to let the waste scatter USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 45 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 46: ...s not replaced properly printing will not be possible using the punch function Close the cover of the punch module USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 46 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 47: ...een Double tapping Pinch Spread Operation types Tapping Touch the panel with your finger and then lift it quickly Use this method to select a key ta b or check box Long touching Touch the panel with your finger and hold it f or a while Keep holding long touching it on the action panel or characters in the text box to display characters in a balloon USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S h...

Page 48: ...uring preview Sliding Slide the scroll bar with your finger touching the panel to scroll up and down a list with a l arge number of items Double tapping Touch the screen twice Use this operation to enlarge the image in the preview USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 48 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 49: ...on on respective screens Key tapping A Tap to select an item The selected key turns into a different color B Tap numeric keys to enter numbers C Tap to increase or decrease the value Long touching causes the value to be increased or decreased until you stop touching D Activate to enable the setting E Tap here to close the screen USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa c...

Page 50: ...r up and down It appears when the item does not fit in the screen C Flick the key upwards or downwards The item scrolls up or down Slider sliding A Slide the knob from side to side USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 50 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 51: ...Spread A When a preview screen is pinched the screen image is reduced When spread the image is enlarged When Double tapping the image is also enlarged USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 51 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 52: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 52 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 53: ...n Machine status Icon Machine status Printer data is being processed A mirroring kit is installed Out of order Printer data is being printed A mirroring kit is installed Under configuration Send data exists Enlarge display mode is enabled To set the home screen for each favorite operation group list In Setting mode Web version select User Control Favorite Operation Group List Home Screen List Perf...

Page 54: ...pport system is enable d Connecting to the access point L evel 4 Not connected to the access poin t Connecting to the access point L evel 3 Bad connection of the wireless LA N device in the machine Connecting to the access point L evel 2 Waiting for the access point Connecting to the access point L evel 1 Contact your dealer or SHARP Service Department CHANGING MODES Changing mode from the Home sc...

Page 55: ...hortcut key Changing the name of a shortcut key Returning the shortcut keys to the default layout Changing an MFP display pattern Tap Edit Home on the action panel If user authentication is not used enter the administrator password In image send mode tap to change mode USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 55 of 1441 3 17 201...

Page 56: ... is exited and you return to the home screen Add a shortcut key Tap a place without a shortcut key in home edit mode Tap the function you want to add A shortcut key with the added function appears in the home screen USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 56 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 57: ...u want to delete in home edit mode Tap the Delete Key key on the action panel A confirmation screen appears USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 57 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 58: ...key you want to move Tap the Move Key key on the action panel After tapping the shortcut key you want to delete in step 1 you can also delete the shortcut key by dragging it to the trash can USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 58 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 59: ... to change Tap Change Key Name on the action panel The soft keyboard appears When the external keyboard is installed the external keyboard can be entered the text Enter the name and tap the OK key The name of the selected shortcut key changes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 59 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 60: ...e Reset key The shortcut keys return to the default layout Changing an MFP display pattern Tap MFP Display Pattern Setting on the action panel Tap a display pattern to be changed This changes the display pattern of the touch panel USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 60 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 61: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 61 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 62: ... for enlargement reduction operations Moving the slider t o the left reduces the image and moving the slider to the right enlarges the image This enlarges the image This rotates the preview image of whole page in the arrow s direction The printing r esult is not rotated This displays preview images of respective pages This displays thumbnails of preview images USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M5...

Page 63: ...preview image is displayed by page In the preview screen tap to switch to edit mode Tap the page you want to delete Tap You can also delete the page by tapping the Delete the Page key on the action panel You can also delete by dragging a page to USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 63 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 64: ...deletion tap Tap the Edit End key In the preview screen tap to switch to edit mode Tap the page you want to move USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 64 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 65: ... action panel and then tapping of the destination Tap the Edit End key In the preview screen tap to switch to edit mode Tap the page you want to rotate Drag or to rotate the page USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 65 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 66: ...the Rotate 180 Degrees key on the action panel Tap the Edit End key In the preview screen tap to switch to edit mode Tap the page you want to move Tap You can also set chapter inserts by tapping the Specify Chapter Inserts key on the action USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 66 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 67: ...ew screen tap to switch to edit mode Tap You can also insert a blank page by tapping the Insert Blank Page key on the action panel Tap for the location into which you want to insert a blank page Tap the Edit End key In the preview screen tap to switch to edit mode Tap the Erase Specified Range key on the action panel USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0...

Page 68: ...mage outside the selected range tap the Reverse Erase Range key on the action panel On the action panel select Apply This Erase Position to All Pages or Apply This Erase Position to This Page USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 68 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 69: ...You cannot tap the keys for functions whose settings cannot be changed As necessary repeat the steps to specify the erase range and the pages to which it is applied Tap the Exit key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 69 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 70: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 70 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 71: ...int or send job STOP key Cancel Copy key On the address screen you can enter characters other than numbers and a different key layout is provided You can also move the cursor by using the and keys Tap the C key to delete one character to the left of the cursor USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 71 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM...

Page 72: ...ancel all settings and restore the initial status in each mode In copy mode the Cancel Copy key is displayed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 72 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 73: ...e functions that have been configured If too many functions have been configured to be displayed on the action panel you can slide the panel vertically or tap and to view all In enlarge display mode part of the text on the action panel may not be displayed To display the whole text long touch the partially hidden key or slide the tab of the action panel to the left To always display the action pan...

Page 74: ...a function in Favorite Administrator rights are required Calling a function from Favorite Tap Tap the Edit Favourite key on the action panel Tap the Register Key key Tap the key for the function you want to regisiter Tap Tap the key for the function you want to call USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 74 of 1441 3 17 2016 7...

Page 75: ...tors Settings for calling Favorites and permitting prohibiting editing can be configured in User Control Authority Group List in Setting mode administrator To edit favorites tap and then tap Edit Favorite on the action panel USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 75 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 76: ...e power Turn off the power by pressing the Power button then turn the main power switch to the position Restart the machine Turn off the power by pressing the Power button and then press it again to turn on the power When turning off the main power switch press the Power button on the operation panel and then turn the main power switch to the position In a sudden case of main power outage turn the...

Page 77: ...nderstorm nearby or when you are moving the machine When using the fax or Internet fax function always keep the main power switch in the position In order for some settings to take effect the machine must be restarted In some states of the machine restarting with the Power button may not make the settings take effect In this case turn off the main power switch and then turn it on again USER S MANU...

Page 78: ... or other received data Scanner Lists send jobs of converted images for e mail messages and FTP Desktop send jobs Fax Lists fax send jobs using a telephone line Internet Fax Lists fax send jobs using a telephone line On each tab jobs are classified into three groups The background of the job status display changes as follows Green Job in progress Yellow Warming up waiting Red Waiting for error cle...

Page 79: ...o the Job Queue list after the transfer is completed Job Queue list Lists jobs in progress and in the queue for copying printing from a computer and printing of received fax This list also displays jobs in progress and in the queue for sending fax data or sending image data converted on the machine The jobs move to the Complete list after printing or sending is completed Complete list Lists jobs t...

Page 80: ...op the job tap the Cancel key When you wish to stop a print job being sent from the computer tap the Spool key To delete more than one job operate the check box for Enter Multi Selection Mode on the action panel so that it looks like Printing of a received fax or Internet fax cannot be stopped A job set for transfer in FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS cannot be canceled USER S MANUA...

Page 81: ...p the job for priority processing Tap the Job Queue key Tap the job for priority processing and then tap the Raise Priority key on the action panel Priority processing operation varies as follows depending on the job type Job on the print tab The job currently in progress is suspended to let the priority job make interruption Job on the scanner fax Internet fax tab The priority job is moved direct...

Page 82: ...tions of the broadcast transmission or serial polling jobs However if the priority job is a broadcast transmission job or a serial polling job it will be executed after the fax job in progress is completed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 82 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 83: ...wish to check and then tap the Check Details of Selected Job key on the action panel Different job contents appear in different modes For information on the icons displayed on the job keys or the messages displayed in Status see READING THE JOB LIST USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 83 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 84: ...yed as keys so that you can tap them To check completed jobs you need to be using document filing DOCUMENT FILING SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES FORCE RETENTION DOCUMENT FILING Different job contents appear in different modes For information on the icons displayed on the job keys or the messages displayed in Status see READING THE JOB LIST USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica s...

Page 85: ...PC Fax transmission job Internet fax transmission job I ncluding Direct SMTP PC I Fax transmission job Scan to HDD file print job Internet fax reception job I ncluding Direct SMTP Broadcast job Inbound routin g job Tandem copy print job Reprinting of multiple files as grouped into a single file OSA scan job This appears in a multi mode broadcast job Messages displayed in Status Job in progress USE...

Page 86: ... up Warming up Limit Having reached the account limit Error An error occurred while the job was being executed Reserved job Display Status Waiting The job is waiting to be executed Retry Mode The job is being retried due to a communication error or ot her problem Waiting for confirmation of the transmi ssion Waiting for confirmation of Internet fax transmission A day and time is displayed Timer tr...

Page 87: ...Delete Deleted received data in the image check screen Number of successful transmission d estinations Total destinations OK Completion of a broadcast transmission serial polling or inb ound routing operation If transmission to 3 destinations was successful out of a to tal of 5 003 005 OK will appear No response An error occurred because there was no response from th e destination Busy An error oc...

Page 88: ...x function NGxxxxxx Transmission reception was not successful because a co mmunication error occurred a 6 digit error code appears in xxxxxx Error An error occurred while the job was being executed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 88 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 89: ...ges that the user can copy or scan is displayed When a limitation is set for the number of pages that a user can use the use count for the user that has logged in is displayed If an incorrect user number is entered three times in a row If A Warning when Login Fails is enabled in the system settings the operation panel will be locked for five minutes if an incorrect user number is entered three tim...

Page 90: ...disable User Control Default Settings Display Usage Status after Login To change the message display time In Setting mode select System Settings Operation Settings Message Time Setting When the user number is an 8 digit number this step is not necessary Login takes place automatically after the user number is entered USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0...

Page 91: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 91 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 92: ...a row If A Warning when Login Fails is enabled in the system settings the operation panel will be locked for five minutes if an incorrect login name or password is entered three times in a row Contact the machine administrator to check the login name password assigned to you To release the operation panel lock In Setting mode Web version select User Control Default Settings to release the lock To ...

Page 93: ... select a user name from the User List screen When LDAP authentication is used the E mail Address key may appear depending on the authentication method Tap the E mail Address text box and enter your e mail address To store a user name In Setting mode select User Control User List Also register detailed information such as the login name user number and password Ask the administrator of the machine...

Page 94: ...ord tap the OK key When authentication is by LDAP server and you have different passwords stored in User List and in the LDAP server use the password stored in the LDAP server LDAP authentication is used when the administrator of the server provides LDAP service on the LAN local area network To have the user name and password registered In Setting mode select User Control User List USER S MANUAL M...

Page 95: ...oft keyboard Tap Authenticate to and select the LDAP server to log in When a limitation is set for the number of pages that a user can use the use count for the user that has logged in is displayed To limit the number of pages that a user can use In Setting mode select User Control Page Limit Group List To hide the number of pages that can be used after login In Setting mode disable User Control D...

Page 96: ...u have finished using the machine and are ready to log out tap Logout USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 96 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 97: ...on and condition under which you enter characters If External Keyboard Priority is selected in Setting mode System Settings Operation Settings Set Keyboard Priority the soft keyboard will not appear To register words In Setting mode select System Settings Operation Settings Soft Keyboard Template Setting USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Ma...

Page 98: ...unction Description AS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED ENTER A UTO POWER SHUT OFF M ODE The machine returns from Auto Power Shut Off and enters Auto Po wer Shut Off mode as soon as printing is completed ECO SCAN The machine is operated with the fusing unit turned off for non printi ng operations that do not use the fusing unit such as fax and image transmission POWER ON OFF SCHEDUL ING FUNCTION...

Page 99: ...sition time On 1min As soon as the remote job is finished ente r Auto power shut off mode Off On Preheat Mode Setting 1min 1min Turn off Panel Display during pre heat mod e On On Each Energy Save settings in the Power Management Setting is not applied when Nomal Eco mode is used USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 99 of 144...

Page 100: ...tton is pressed A message appears 15 seconds before Preheat Mode is entered To close the message and continue normal operation tap Continue The message appears again 15 seconds before the end of the extension of normal operation time If no action is taken within 15 seconds after the message appears the machine enters preheat mode To set preheat mode In Setting mode select Energy Save Preheat Mode ...

Page 101: ... Power Save button is not lit This mode is cleared when print data is being received fax data is being output or when the Power Save button is pressed while it is blinking A message appears 15 seconds before Auto Power Shut Off Mode is entered To close the message and continue normal operation tap the Continue button The message appears again 15 seconds before the end of the extension of normal op...

Page 102: ...agement Setting Display message for delay of entry into Preheat Mode Auto Power Shutoff in Setting mode administrators USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 102 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 103: ...Shut Off Timer immediately after completing the print job To set As soon as the remote job is finished enter Auto power shut off mode In Setting mode select Energy Save Power Management Setting As soon as the remote job is finished enter Auto power shut off mode USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 103 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14...

Page 104: ...al are performed with the fusing unit turned off To set Eco scan In Setting mode select Energy Save Eco Scan Setting USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 104 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 105: ...d off for the machine to reduce power consumption Setting Power ON OFF Scheduling Function In Setting mode select Energy Save Power ON OFF Schedule Setting USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 105 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 106: ...quency by analyzing the usage of the machine during a certain time period To enable the power management setting In Setting mode select Energy Save Power Management Setting USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 106 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 107: ... the day as a Specific Date and define an energy saving pattern only for that day To specify operation for the specific date In Setting mode administrator select Energy Save Power Management Setting Specific Date Operation Settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 107 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 108: ...NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 108 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 109: ...r land scape orientation Paper that can only be set in the lan dscape orientation 8 1 2 x 11 A4 B5 12 x 18 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 A3W A3 B4 Paper set in the landscape orientation Paper set in the portrait o rientation Can be placed only in the landscape orie ntation USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 109 of 1441 3 1...

Page 110: ...sing any paper consult the dealer or SHARP Service Department The image quality and toner fusibility of paper may change due to ambient conditions operating conditions and paper characteristics resulting in image quality inferior to that of Sharp standard paper Before using any paper consult the dealer or SHARP Service Department The use of non recommended or non usable paper may result in skewed ...

Page 111: ...avy paper Per mitt Recycled paper colored paper and pre punched paper must meet the same specifications as plain paper Before using any paper consult the dealer or SHARP Service Department For detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can be loaded into each tray of the machine see SPECIFICATIONS in the Quick Start Guide and TRAY SETTINGS in Setting mode User s Manual Recycled pape...

Page 112: ...ted Per mitt ed Permitted Pre p unche d Permitted Permitted Per mitt ed Permitted Color Permitted Permitted Per mitt ed Permitted Labels Per mitt ed Gloss y pap er Per mitt ed Trans paren cy fil m Per mitt ed Tab P aper Per mitt ed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 112 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 113: ...own Facing up Paper that cannot be used Special media for an ink jet printer fine paper glossy paper glossy film etc Carbon paper or thermal paper Pasted paper Paper with clips Paper with fold marks Torn paper Oil feed transparency film Thin paper less than 15 lbs 55 g m2 Heavy paper as thick as 110 lbs cover 300 g m2 over Irregularly shaped paper When Disabling of Duplex is set for Letter Head or...

Page 114: ...ther printer or multifunction device Paper with a wave like pattern due to moisture absorption Non recommended paper Iron on transfer paper Japanese paper Perforated paper USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 114 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 115: ...Adjust guide plates A and B by squeezing their lock levers and sliding them to If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded be sure to check the settings in Setting mode Incorrect setting affects automatic paper selection action It may cause print failure printing on paper of a wrong size or type or paper misfeeds Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press ...

Page 116: ...he print side facing up The stack must not be higher than the indicator line maximum of 500 sheets Gently push the paper tray into the machine Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine Fan the paper well before loading it If the paper is not fanned multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 download...

Page 117: ...e from the paper previously loaded be sure to check the settings in Setting mode An incorrect setting may cause print failure printing on paper of an incorrect size or type or paper misfeeds To check the type and size of paper In Setting mode select System Settings Paper Tray Settings Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray Pull out the paper tray Lift the feed roller and ...

Page 118: ...he machine and cause a misfeed Lower the feed roller and gently push the paper tray into the machine USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 118 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 119: ...nt Operation Pull out the paper tray Gently pull the tray out until it stops Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray If you loaded paper of a different type from the paper previously loaded be sure to check the settings in Setting mode To check the type of paper to be set in the tray In Setting mode select System Settings Paper Tray Settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N...

Page 120: ...500 sheets Gently push the paper tray into the machine Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine Fan the paper well before loading it If the paper is not fanned multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 120 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 121: ...ize in landscape orientation When using plain paper other than Sharp standard paper or special media other than SHARP recommended transparency film or when printing on the reverse side of paper that has been printed on one side load paper one sheet at a time Loading more than one sheet at a time will cause misfeeds Before loading paper straighten any curling in the paper When adding paper remove a...

Page 122: ...ency film into the bypass tray the rounded corner should be at the front left when the film is placed in the landscape orientation or at the far left when the film is oriented in the portrait orientation When loading multiple sheets of transparency film into the bypass tray fan the sheets several times before loading When printing on transparency film remove each sheet as it is printed and output ...

Page 123: ...lopes For more information consult a qualified service technician Some operating environments may cause creasing smudging misfeeds poor toner fusing or machine failure Do not use the following envelopes Those with a metal piece a plastic hook or a ribbon hook Those with a string for closing Those with a window Those with a lining Those with an uneven surface finished with titling or emboss Duplex ...

Page 124: ...off flaps for sealing the envelopes Important points when using embossed paper label sheets The effect of asperity surfaces of embossed paper may affect the print quality depending on the type of embossed paper For more information consult the dealer or SHARP Service Department Some labels may have to be loaded into the bypass tray in the specified orientation Follow such instructions If a form is...

Page 125: ... the paper Load the paper with the print side facing down Insert the paper along the bypass tray guides all the way into the bypass tray until it stops Do not place heavy objects on the bypass tray or press down on the tray USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 125 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 126: ... on the right side cover gently open the cover For Letter Head and Pre Printed set the paper with the print side up However when Disabling of Duplex is enabled set the print side in the same orientation as in the regular mode facing down Do not force the paper in If the bypass tray guides are set wider than the paper move the bypass tray guides in until they correctly fit the width of the paper If...

Page 127: ...e adjusting levers two to the lower pressure position as shown Close the right side cover USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 127 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 128: ... pressure adjusting levers Be sure to return the levers to the normal pressure position before printing or copying on paper other than envelopes Otherwise fusing problems paper misfeeds or equipment failure may occur USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 128 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 129: ...uxiliary guide of the long paper feeding tray Pull out the extension guide of the bypass tray Attach the long paper feeding tray onto the extension guide of the bypass tray Replace the extension guide of the bypass tray USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 129 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 130: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 130 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 131: ... manner Original containing pages of different sizes Set Mixed Size Original in Others An original cannot be detected if all pages are of the same size but some of them are set in a different orientation Thin original 9 lbs to 14 lbs 35 g m2 49 g m2 Set Slow Scan Mode in Others For this type 2 sided scanning is disabled If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid ink or pasteup glue wait ...

Page 132: ...fy the orientation of the original using Original Setting Before inserting originals into the document feeder tray be sure to remove any staples or paper clips If they cannot be removed use the document glass USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 132 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 133: ...ollowing originals Incorrect original size detection original misfeeds and smudges may result Transparency film or other transparent material for backup copy tracing paper carbon paper thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon should not be fed through the document feeder Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be damaged crumpled folded loosely pasted together ...

Page 134: ...tudinal x 39 3 8 transversal 297 mm longitudinal x 1000 mm transversal When the original is a non standard size see the appropriate explanation below for the mode you are using COPIER SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE FAX SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES IMAGE SEND SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES Allowed original weights 1 sided scanning 9 lbs to 34 lbs 35 g...

Page 135: ...Up to 150 sheets can be inserted After scanning is finished on the automatic document feeder remove originals from the original exit tray USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 135 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 136: ...owly Abruptly closing the automatic document feeder may damage it Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the automatic document feeder When scanning a thick book or other thick original push up the back of the automatic document feeder and then place the original When closing open the automatic document feeder all the way and then close it USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N...

Page 137: ...he automatic document feeder Load the paper with the print side facing down Place the original face down and align the top left corner of the original with back left at the tip of the mark of the document glass Do not place any objects under the original size detector Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector or disable correct detection ...

Page 138: ...causing excessive use of toner When placing a non standard size original on the document glass the size can be detected easily if a blank sheet of 8 1 2 x 11 A4 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 B5 or other standard size paper is placed on top of the original USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 138 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 139: ...d addresses as Group enables you to easily send messages to multiple destinations simply by specifying a group Up to 2000 entries in all can be stored for Contacts and Group The address book can store up to 6000 addresses One Contacts can store up to 500 addresses One Group can store up to 500 addresses USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Man...

Page 140: ...nd the tapped Contacts or Group is selected After selection tap To add Contacts and Groups refer to the following When the Address Book key is tapped on the e mail base screen groups and contacts having e mail addresses are displayed If user authentication is enabled registered contacts can be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you are allowed to access SETTIN...

Page 141: ...t The narrowed down condition is displayed under the Search by Category key Narrowing by job type Tap the Search by Job Type key to select a job on the screen that appears To narrow by Group tap the Group key After the settings are completed tap USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 141 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 142: ...abet to narrow down addresses For example tap A on the index bar to display Contacts stored with search text starting with A Narrowing by keyword Tap to display a search screen Select a target for search enter a keyword and then USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 142 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 143: ...r of search numbers Tapping the Switch Display key displays a list in ascending order descending order or in the order of search numbers The display is switched in the order of Switch Display Up Switch Display Down Search Number Order USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 143 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 144: ...Name and Initial To specify a category select one from a category list that appears when the entry box is tapped To register a category name In Setting mode select Address Book Category Settings If user authentication is enabled the tab for address publication setting appears Setting address publication enables stored Contacts and Group to be shared within a specified group or stored as personal c...

Page 145: ...TS AND GROUPS Check Set to the address as usually used to set that address as the preferred over the others if two or more addresses are stored for Contacts FTP Desktop and Network Folder addresses can be registered from Address Book in Setting Mode Web version USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 145 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 ...

Page 146: ...ction panel If Set as Default used is not checked for any address a confirmation screen is displayed to ask you whether to select the default address USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 146 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 147: ...e home screen Tap the Add New key on the action panel Tap the Contacts key to enter basic information Be sure to enter Name and Initial To specify a category select one from a category list that appears when the entry box is tapped Global address search requires an LDAP server To register a category name In Setting mode select Address Book Category Settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N...

Page 148: ...ch key To change the search target tap for Item You can select Name or Address Number If user authentication is enabled the tab for address publication setting appears Setting address publication enables stored Contacts and Group to be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you are allowed to access SETTING THE SCOPE FOR PUBLICIZING CONTACTS AND GROUPS USER S MANU...

Page 149: ...Tap the End Registration key on the action panel If Set as Default used is not checked for any address a confirmation screen is displayed to ask you whether to select the default address To check address information select the address and tap the Confirm Address Information key on the action panel USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals M...

Page 150: ... then tap the New Registration with Address Book key on the action panel When you tap Additional Registration with Address Book on the action panel you can add the address to a contact stored in the address book Tap the Contacts key to enter basic information If user authentication is enabled the tab for address publication setting appears Setting address publication enables stored Contacts and Gr...

Page 151: ... not checked for any address a confirmation screen is displayed to ask you whether to select the default address Tap the End Registration key on the action panel Tap the OK key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 151 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 152: ...the address book screen tap the Register Edit Address key on the action panel or tap the Register Edit Address in Address Book icon in the home screen Tap the Add New key on the action panel Tap the Group key to enter basic information Tap the Select From Address Book key on the action panel To directly enter a new address for a Group tap the Enter Address Directly key on the action panel USER S M...

Page 153: ...ils of Address Selected Next key on the action panel Tap the address to be registered in the Group and then tap the Execute key You can select more than one address The selection is cleared and the screen closes if you tap the before tapping the OK key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 153 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 154: ...istration is completed tap the Enter and Return key on the action panel Tap the End Registration key on the action panel USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 154 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 155: ...on in the home screen Select a Contacts or Group you wish to edit and tap the Edit key on the action panel To delete a Contacts or Group tap the Delete key on the action panel For editing you can only select one Contacts or Group at a time For deleting you can select more than one Contacts or Group at a time If you have logged in as the administrator you can delete all addresses stored in the addr...

Page 156: ...addresses In the address book screen tap the Register Edit Address key on the action panel or tap the Register Edit Address in Address Book icon in the home screen Select a Contacts or Group and tap the Edit key on the action panel Only one contact or group can be selected If more than one is selected the Edit key does not appear The address type cannot be changed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N M...

Page 157: ...ction panel To delete an address tap the Delete key on the action panel To edit or delete you can only select one address at a time To check address information tap the Confirm Registered Information key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 157 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 158: ... or delete an address for a job in a job queue You can only edit addresses in the network folder on the edit screen The Add New screen cannot be displayed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 158 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 159: ...r esses are preferentially displayed as personal contact in the user s ad dress book User Group Publication of Contacts and Group is limited to the specified group Up to eight groups per Contacts or Group can be set as the publicit y scope Operation Limiting the scope to the user Limiting the scope to the specified user group Limiting the scope to the user In the address registration screen tap th...

Page 160: ...p the Public Address Setting tab and then tap the Designate Public Address key If you have logged in as the administrator select any user name desired from the user list To register a user In Setting mode select User Control User List Register User USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 160 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 161: ... to open addresses After the settings are completed tap To register a user group In Setting mode select User Control User Group List USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 161 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 162: ...of the executed print and send jobs to enable efficient management For example you can assign a co de by customer and collect cost information by customer from job logs Code example Issue of company A Sub Code Available when the main code alone is not sufficient to enable man agement of billing codes For example you can assign monthly cos t information to a sub code and collect the total monthly c...

Page 163: ...lling Code to Enable Collecting billing codes Select Job Log Operation of Setting Mode Web version and click Save button to download the job logs Then sum up the data by classifying and arranging the stored job logs USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 163 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 164: ...ance REGISTERING A NEW BILLING CODE To enable the billing code Select Setting Mode Administrator Billing Code Setting Administration Settings then set Use Billing Code to Enable To retain the specified billing code at the time of mode transition Select Setting Mode Administrator Billing Code Setting Administration Settings then set the Take Over Billing Code at Mode Transition check box to This el...

Page 165: ...cated user has entered previously Tap and select the main code from the list To search for the main code or main code name Tap When the search window is displayed enter the main code and main code name then tap the Start Search key The search result list is displayed Tap the Enter key To cancel the selection from the list Tap the Cancel and Return key on the action panel This cancels the selected ...

Page 166: ...splay Details key on the action panel The detail window is displayed Check the details then tap Tap the Select from List key of the sub code Tap the OK key To clear the value of the specified billing code Tap the CA key Enter the billing code again When the billing code entry window is displayed tap the text box in Main Code then enter the main code USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S ...

Page 167: ...e code is set to the main code Tap the text box of Sub Code then enter the sub code Tap the OK key To clear the value of the specified billing code Tap the CA key Enter the billing code again USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 167 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 168: ... List key of the sub code The subsequent steps are the same as for the main code To register a billing code from Setting Mode Select Setting Mode Billing Code Setting Main Code List or Sub Code List Register a main code in Main Code List and a sub code in Sub Code List A total of up to 2 000 main and sub codes can be registered To register a group Select Setting Mode Administrator User Control Org...

Page 169: ...tion panel Tap the Add New key on the action panel To return to the billing code selection window Tap Tap the text box of Main Code then type in the main code USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 169 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 170: ...stination refer to Shared range of billing code Up to eight groups can be specified After the setting has been completed tap Tap the text box of Main Code Name then type in the main code name If necessary select the share range of billing code The public destination of a billing code is not displayed if user authentication is not performed The mode is automatically set to Public to All Tap and sel...

Page 171: ...evious window To continuously register other billing codes tap Register Next Billing Code To cancel the registration Tap the Cancel and Return key on the action panel This cancels all the registered billing codes and returns the screen to the previous window Tap the End Registration key on the action panel To return to the billing code entry window Tap the CA key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX...

Page 172: ...uent steps are the same as for the main code To edit or register a billing code from Setting Mode Select Setting Mode Billing Code Setting Main Code List or Sub Code List Edit or register a main code in Main Code List and a sub code in Sub Code List When the billing code entry window is displayed tap the Select from List key of the main code Tap the Add Edit Billing Code key on the action panel US...

Page 173: ...nish the registration procedure Tap and select the main code to be edited then tap the Edit key on the action panel To return to the billing code selection window Tap Edit the main code as required Tap the End Registration key on the action panel USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 173 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 174: ...ow Tap the CA key When the billing code entry window is displayed tap the Select from List key of the main code Tap the Add Edit Billing Code key on the action panel Tap and select the main code to be deleted then tap the Delete key on the action panel USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 174 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 175: ...g code selection window Tap When the confirmation message appears tap the Delete key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 175 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 176: ...on function the following preparation is required In Setting mode select System Settings Operation Settings Remote Operation Settings Remote Software Operation and select Allow for Operational Authority Connect the machine to the network Install a VNC application software recommended VNC software RealIVNC in your computer After the preparation is completed follow the operation described below to s...

Page 177: ...he VNC application software or tap Check with the administrator of the machine for its IP address Use the operation panel in the same way as you would on the machine However you cannot enter values in series by continuously clicking the key To set the operational authority for the remote operation function In Setting mode select System Settings Operation Settings Remote Operation Settings USER S M...

Page 178: ... Screen of a Web page Menu List Tap to display the menu list The following shows the items of the menu list To enable Web page browsing the optional Web browsing expansion kit may be required depending on your country or region or the type of your machine USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 178 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 179: ...rmation of the Web page currently displayed Settings list Tap to display the settings list The following shows the items of the settings list Display Settings Changes the Web page display settings The selected item with t he checkbox set to can be displayed or enabled The displ ay settings of the following items can be changed Image GIF Animation Table Match Contents with Screen W idth Javascript ...

Page 180: ...e Network Settings Proxy Settings Preference Resets all environmental settings including the favorite history and cookie to the factory default settings Home Screen For the model equipped with a Web browsing kit as standard the Web browser icon is displayed in the home screen Viewing PDF Files When a Web page includes a link to a PDF file you can display the PDF file by tapping the link When you a...

Page 181: ... the print dialog Property Displays the PDF properties Thumbnail When a PDF page is zoomed in this menu can be switched to ei ther show or hide the thumbnail showing the area of the page cu rrently displayed Specifications of the Web Browsing Function USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 181 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 182: ...e Supported Supported image GIF87a GIF89a JPEG PNG BMP Animation GIF MNG PDF PDF 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 Some formats may not be displayed or printed When displaying Web pages using this Web browsing function Web pages will appear or be printed in a way that is slightly different compared to when they are viewed or printed using conventional PC browsers and some features may be restricted USER S MANUAL MX...

Page 183: ... If two or more standard applications have been stored the screen for selecting a standard application will appear Tap the standard application that you wish to use If only one standard application has been stored connection to the standard application will begin To set a standard application in Setting mode In Setting mode select Application Settings External Applications Settings Standard Applic...

Page 184: ...essage Connecting to the external application appears while the machine communicates with the standard application USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 184 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 185: ...ation User authentication by the external account application cannot be used However the external account application can be used in combination with the internal account function External account application setup After setting an external application in Setting Mode restart the machine to enable the setting To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER Operation in external account mode The fo...

Page 186: ... of the machine External count mode can also be used when the user control function is disabled To enable external authentication mode In Setting mode select System Settings Sharp OSA Settings External Account Setting and enable the Enable Authentication by External Server checkbox The user control function of the machine cannot be used in external authentication mode However User Registration Use...

Page 187: ...System Settings Sharp OSA Settings External Account Setting and enable the External Account Control setting alone USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 187 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 188: ...stem Settings Administrator on the operation panel follow these steps Login to the machine as an administrator to change System Settings on the operation panel when the Card reader is connected In addition to login by tapping the Admin Login key the system settings administrator can also be accessed when login is performed by selecting a user with administrator rights from the user list or by ente...

Page 189: ...eate Register a card holder user who has a CAC card Enter a User Name Example Card Holder Enter an Initial Example CH Select the authority group Card Holder Authority as set up in step 3 All CAC cardholders will belong to this group and have this specific set of permissions Under System Settings tab it is recommended to make sure that the Clock Adjust is set to Prohibited and then click the Submit...

Page 190: ... Skip these steps if only users with CAC card can access all MFP functions machine however if administrator requires network authentication for example LDAP then Authentication Settings needs to change to Network Authentication Setup the Network Authentication parameters for example LDAP If authentication in the local domain is desired click User Control CAC Configuration Settings Make sure the Do...

Page 191: ...ogged in Users is set to Allowed and then click the Submit button Next click User Control User List in the Web page menu Then select Add Create Register a site guest who doesn t have a CAC card Enter a User Name Example Site Guest Enter an Initial Example SG Select the authority group Site Guest Authority as set up in step 1 Click the Submit button to save the settings Under System Settings tab it...

Page 192: ...rights are required When Sender Name is enabled in File Naming the user name of the CAC card is set in Sender Name automatically All user name characters before the from user e mail address E mail to Self only and Allow Site E mail Address Specify whether Scan to Self and Scan to Site are enabled To configure these settings select System Settings Image Send Settings Scan settings E mail Setting in...

Page 193: ... set the Sign When E mail to Self Only is enabled or E mail to Self Only and Allow Site E mail Address are enabled the selection of addresses from the address book and direct entry of addresses are not possible The only image send functions that can be used are Scan to Self and Scan to Site In this case the following items do not function regardless of whether or not they are enabled Disable Scan ...

Page 194: ...e algorithm that is used for e mail encryption The e mail will be encrypted using AES256 AES12 8 or 3DES whichever algorithm is specified When a signature is appended or the e mail is encrypted the maximum allowed number of recipients may decrease CAC Configuration Settings Specify CAC related configuration settings To configure these settings select User Control CAC Configuration Settings in the ...

Page 195: ...ertificate On your computer prepare the certificate file that you wish to install Click the Import button in Security Settings CAC Certificate Management in the Web page menu Select the certificate file that you wish to install and click the Execute button Configure the Kerberos server settings to perform PKI certificate authentication Kerberos must be setup to perform PKI certificate authenticati...

Page 196: ...SP Server Service URL in Security Settings OCSP Settings in the Web page menu For example http ocsp example com Confidential Printing When Force Retention is enabled in the CAC configuration settings with the DSK and CAC option installed all the Sharing Mode settings except for Printer are checked Disabled as a default value in Disabling of Document Filing which appears after selecting Security Se...

Page 197: ...C are permitted to use the multifunction machine in the system settings a message screen will appear upon selecting a function which is not permitted Users should tap the Login key The above login screen will appear to let you perform the login procedure Users without a CAC should tap the The usual base screen will appear however the functions that can be used are restricted in the system settings...

Page 198: ...word If you enter an incorrect password three times in a row password entry using that CAC card will not be possible Contact the administrator of the machine The CAC card will become locked if the correct password is not entered usually after 3 attempts The 3 attempts are part of the Card functionality not the MFP For the exact number of attempts please consult your administrator To perform authen...

Page 199: ...the login screen without performing CAC card authentication tap the System Settings Administrator Perform LDAP server access control Set the LDAP server that is used when authentication using an LDAP server is performed To configure this setting select User Control Various Settings in the Web page menu Administrator rights are required System Settings Administrator CAC Configuration Setting Specif...

Page 200: ...he steps below Tap the HDD File retrieve Tap the key of the folder that contains the desired file Select the file to print from the folder where the job was sent Image Send When CAC authentication is used you can select any scan function as in normal scan When Display only the Files of Logged in Users is set to Allowed no files appear in the Document Filing folder without login So please make sure...

Page 201: ...d function When Scan to Self or Scan to Site is enabled the base screen will change as indicated below System Settings Administrator E mail Setting Specify whether or not Scan to Self and Scan to Site are enabled Enter an e mail address for Scan to Site To configure this setting select System Settings Image Send Settings Scan settings E mail Setting in the Web page menu Administrator rights are re...

Page 202: ...rypt E mail If Encrypt E mail is enabled in Sign Encrypt E mail Setting this is fixed in the selected state Sign Encrypt E mail Setting 4 Address Change key Use this to switch between the Scan to Self and Scan to Site e mail addresses The Encrypt E mail setting for an address cannot be changed to ON once it has been specified as a destination while the Sign E mail can When the Encrypt E mail setti...

Page 203: ...e is manipulated you can choose to have only folders and files of the login user be displayed If you wish to have only folders and files of the login user be displayed change Display only the files of Logged in Users to Allowed When the CAC option is installed the default value is changed to Allowed To configure this setting click User Control Authority Group List and then click Add in the Web pag...

Page 204: ...useful for CAC authentication and procedures for deleting user information LDAP and SMTP SMTP and Kerberos To configure this setting select Network Settings Ser vice Settings in the Web page menu LDAP To configure this setting select Network Settings LD AP Settings in the Web page menu LDAP Global address book To configure this setting select Network Settings Ge neral Settings in the Web page menu...

Page 205: ... settings Select Data Clearing Settings Select all these 4 operations one by one Clear All Memory Clear Document Filing Data Clear All Data In Jobs Completed List and Clear Address Book and Registered Data USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 205 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 206: ...the key is tapped instructions for removing the misfeed will appear Follow the instructions When the misfeed is cleared the message will automatically disappear The fusing unit and paper output area are hot When removing a misfeed do not touch the fusing unit You may burn yourself USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 206 of ...

Page 207: ...creen is displayed Changing mode from each mode The initial copy mode screen is displayed If the switch key of each mode is displayed tap the Copy key to select the copy mode Tap the Copy mode icon Tap on the mode display Tap Copy USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 207 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 208: ...he displayed contents of the above screen will vary depending on the devices installed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 208 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 209: ...Tap the Preview key to scan the original Check the preview image Display the preview image of the scanned original Check settings such as duplex and staple positions in the preview screen To make 2 sided copies configure the 2 sided copy settings before scanning the original When not checking the preview image tap the Start key to start copying USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http ...

Page 210: ...ap the CA key When the CA key is tapped all settings selected to that point are cleared and you will return to the base screen To cancel copying Tap the STOP key Before starting copying tap the File key or Quick File key on the action panel to save the scanned original as data QUICK FILE FILE USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M36...

Page 211: ...age If you configure the preview you can check the status of the configured preview such as the staple position or page layout You can also drag the preview image to edit it for example changing rotating or deleting an original page MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE PREVIEW SCREEN USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M...

Page 212: ...r settings Selections Standard sizes detected original sizes Document Glass Document feeder tray automatic docu ment feeder Inch 1 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A4 A3 Inch 2 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 13 216 mm x 33 0 mm 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 13 216 mm x 330 m m 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x ...

Page 213: ... both the vertical and horizontal orientations is set horizontally Orientation of placed original Place the original as shown below If you place the original in an incorrect orientation it may result in punching at an unexpected position or stapling On Preview Screen view the original orientation or preview image COPY PREVIEW Even when Original is set to Auto some original sizes may be detected as...

Page 214: ...o set Rotation Copy In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Rotation Copy Setting The rotation copy function is available in the automatic paper selection or automatic ratio selection mode or when the original or paper size is the same while the orientation is different USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 214 o...

Page 215: ...key If the selected tray runs out of paper during a copy job and there is another tray that has the same size and type of paper that tray will be automatically selected and the copy job will continue To change the initially selected tray In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Initial Status Settings Paper Tray When selecting the bypass tray Specify the paper type and size based on th...

Page 216: ...e Paper Select screen by tapping the machine image on the base screen To automatically select the tray Tap the CA key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 216 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 217: ...er Select key SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Tap the Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies Depending on the size of the placed original there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not selected automatically In this event change the paper tray manually USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S...

Page 218: ...ore sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 218 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 219: ...originals have been scanned Make sure that the desired paper tray is selected To change the paper tray tap the Paper Select key SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Tap the Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 219 of...

Page 220: ...ore sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 220 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 221: ...mpleted tap To make 2 sided copies configure the 2 sided copy settings before scanning the original Dual side copy helps to save paper To make 2 sided copies configure the 2 sided copy settings before scanning the original USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 221 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 222: ...ct key SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING To make 2 sided copies of a 1 sided portrait original placed horizontally or to invert the reverse side with respect to the front side when copying a 2 sided original set the Rotate back face 180 deg checkbox to USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 222 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 223: ...e may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not selected automatically In this event change the paper size manually To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 223 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 224: ...settings are completed tap Dual side copy helps to save paper To change the default 2 sided copy mode In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Initial Status Settings 2 Sided Copy USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 224 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 225: ...ect key SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Tap the Start key to start copying The 2 Sided 2 Sided key and 1 Sided 2 Sided key cannot be used when copying from the document glass Depending on the size of the placed original there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not selected automatically In this event change the paper tray manually USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M...

Page 226: ...ify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 226 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 227: ...used in combination with the following functions Job Build Tandem Copy Book Copy Card Shot Multi Page Enlargement Original Count Proof Copy Preview Setting Book Divide When you place an original on the document glass you cannot select the 2 sided copying sort mode and staple sort features to make an interrupt copy If any of these functions are necessary use the automatic document feeder If user au...

Page 228: ...tings Tap the Start key to start interrupt copying When the interrupt copy job is completed the interrupted job resumes To cancel interrupt copy tap the Cancel key The interrupt copy function does not display the preview of the scanned original USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 228 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 229: ... address book ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN You need to store the destination in the address book in advance STORING CONTACTS The facsimile and image transmission starts after the copy and the settings same as the copy are used for transmission However the same results as the copy may not be provided by some functions USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 download...

Page 230: ...nsmission However some settings may be unavailable depending on the function Tap the Start key to start copying After the copy the transmission starts You cannot use the soft keyboard to enter an address If you cannot find the recipient in the address book enter it in the address book STORING CONTACTS You can preview the scanned original by tapping the Preview key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N M...

Page 231: ...er the copy you cannot preview the settings before transmission USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 231 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 232: ...opying to obtain the most suitable copy To change the default exposure In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Initial Status Settings Exposure Type To adjust the exposure level when Auto is used for the copy exposure In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Copy Setting Copy Exposure Adjustment USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portal...

Page 233: ...p the key matching the original Original image type select keys To change the default exposure In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Initial Status Settings Exposure Type To adjust the exposure level when Auto is used for the copy exposure In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Copy Setting Copy Exposure Adjustment USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http s...

Page 234: ...olor shading and fine text found on most maps Light original Use this mode for originals with light pencil writing Tap or slide the slider to adjust the range to be suppressed If you adjust the exposure with the original type selected to Auto the original image type is automatically selected to Text Printed Photo After the adjustment tap When using a copy or printed page from the machine as an ori...

Page 235: ...ge Type 1 to 2 Dark originals such as a newspaper 3 Normal density originals 4 to 5 Originals written in pencil or light colored text USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 235 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 236: ...n the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS For a non standard size original the size must be entered in order to use Auto Magnification Selection To change the default ratio In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Initial Status Settings Copy Ratio USER S MANUAL MX M...

Page 237: ...io will appear in the ratio display To cancel the Auto Ratio Selection setting Tap the Auto Image key on the action panel to clear the check box like To return the ratio to 100 Tap the Copy Ratio key to display the ratio menu and then tap the 100 key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 237 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 238: ... allows you to adjust the ratio in 1 units like Up to two ratio values can be added to preset ratio keys respectively for enlargement and reduction Specifying the paper size Specify the paper sizes of the original and output to automatically obtain the appropriate ratio Specifying the image dimensions Specify the image sizes of the original and output to automatically obtain the appropriate ratio ...

Page 239: ...der is used the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both between 25 to 200 To return the ratio to 100 Tap the Copy Ratio key to display the ratio menu and then tap the 100 key To add any ratio as a preset ratio In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Copy Setting Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios To select the added preset ratio tap the Other Ratio key USER S MANUAL MX ...

Page 240: ...desired value by the numeric keys then adjust it with Up to two frequently used ratio values can be added to the preset ratio key respectively for enlargement and reduction Copy Settings If you tap the Smaller key on the action panel the ratio will be set lower than the specified one by 3 USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M...

Page 241: ...re completed tap In the preview screen check whether or not settings produce the required results Specifying the image dimensions Tap the Copy Ratio key To cancel all settings Tap the CA key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 241 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 242: ... reduced images Tap the area of image size and output size and enter the sizes using the numeric keys After the settings are completed tap In the preview screen check whether or not settings produce the required results USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 242 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 243: ...ct size Tap the C key and then enter the correct size To cancel all settings Tap the CA key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 243 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 244: ...m key which allows you to adjust the ratio in 1 units Specifying the image dimensions Specify the image sizes of the original and output to automatically obtain the appropriate ratio Enter the vertical and horizontal sizes Operation Using the preset ratio key Specifying the image dimensions When the automatic document feeder is used the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both betwe...

Page 245: ... for the ratio is selected Specifying the image dimensions Tap the Copy Ratio key and then tap the XY Zoom key Tap the by Size key To quickly set the ratio first specify a value close to the desired one then adjust it with Tap each area of the X horizontal and Y vertical directions and enter the sizes using the numeric keys USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com po...

Page 246: ...completed tap Tap the area of image size and output size and enter the sizes using the numeric keys If you have entered an incorrect size Tap the C key and then enter the correct size To cancel all settings Tap the CA key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 246 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 247: ...ing an AB original size Specifying a non standard original size Specifying an inch original size Tap the Original key Tap the Inch tab Tap the appropriate original size key After the settings are completed tap Set an original size before scanning the original USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 247 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM...

Page 248: ...ying a non standard original size Tap the Original key Tap the Direct Entry tab Specify the original size Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively and enter the sizes using the numeric keys USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 248 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 249: ... is displayed on the Original key After the settings are completed tap It is convenient to use to finely adjust the entered size USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 249 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 250: ...iting clearing Retrieving a stored original size Storing original sizes editing clearing Tap the Original key Tap the Custom Size tab Tap the Store Delete key The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off Up to 12 non standard original sizes can be stored USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M ...

Page 251: ...ll appear To edit the key tap the Modify key and go to the next step To clear the key tap the Delete key Make sure that the original size has been cleared and tap the key Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively and enter the sizes using the numeric keys USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 251 of 1441 3 ...

Page 252: ...key of the original size that you wish to retrieve After selecting the key of the original size tap the key On the base screen check that the specified size is displayed on the Original key It is convenient to use to finely adjust the entered size To cancel the operation Tap the CA key To cancel the operation Tap the CA key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com po...

Page 253: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 253 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 254: ...he size and type of the loaded paper SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Tap the Type and Size key and select the size and type of the paper SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY For detailed information on paper that can be loaded into the bypass tray see APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES For precautions on loading paper into the bypass tray see LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY USER S...

Page 255: ...DER DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 255 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 256: ...utomatically detects the appropriate AB paper size when loading paper such as A4 or B5 Auto Inch key Automatically detects the appropriate inch paper size when loading paper such as 8 1 2 x11 Size Set key Tap this key to manually specify the paper size that is not detected automatically You can also call the Paper Select screen by tapping the machine image on the base screen USER S MANUAL MX M365N...

Page 257: ...To directly enter a paper size Tap the Inch key to set a paper size in inches or tap the AB key to set it in millimeters After you have entered the paper size using the key tap the OK key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 257 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 258: ...he document glass So rt Sorts the scanned origi nal on a set basis and outputs them Gr ou p Groups the scanned ori ginal on a page basis a nd outputs them Operation Tap the Sort Group key Select the sorting method After the settings are completed tap If a finisher or saddle finisher is installed tap the Sort Group key in Others USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa co...

Page 259: ...et to enable the user to easily remove each set from the output tray To change the output tray tap the Output Tray key and select the output destination USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 259 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 260: ...s and delivers them to the tray Binding Edge Process image OFF Does not staple 1 staple in back 1 staple in front 2 Staples USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 260 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 261: ... sort function A saddle finisher is required to use the saddle stitch function To change the output tray tap the Output Tray key and select the output destination If the number of scanned originals exceeds the staple sheet limit a message is displayed Tap the Continue or Cancel key Continue Continues sorting without stapling Cancel Cancels the staple sort setting USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX...

Page 262: ...creen appears Confirm the message shown on the screen and tap the On key To change the output tray tap the Output Tray key and select the output destination If the number of scanned originals exceeds the staple sheet limit a message is displayed Tap the Divide Continue or Cancel key Divide Divides the pages into sets that can be stapled and sorts them You cannot use this function if the cover sett...

Page 263: ...ys in sequence You can view punch positions on the PREVIEW SCREEN A punch module is required for paper punch You cannot use 12 x 18 A3W size papers and special media such as transparency film and tab papers You cannot use heavy paper as thick as 129 g m2 over You cannot use a paper punch together with the staple and paper folding USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa ...

Page 264: ...et to enable the user to easily remove each set from the output tray To change the output tray tap the Output Tray key and select the output destination USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 264 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 265: ...riginal pages onto one sheet This function is convenient when you wish to present multiple pages in a compact format or show a view of all pages in a document 2in1 copying 4in1 copying Operation When inserting a cover sheet select Cover Setting to copy only a front sheet to one page and collectively copy the second and subsequent pages USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sha...

Page 266: ...ted Select the layout Select the border A line can be inserted between pages arranged on a sheet After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Check the preview image in the preview screen When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages change the original and tap the Additionally Scan key To cancel the 2in1 4in1 setting Tap the Off key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465...

Page 267: ...pies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 267 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 268: ... settings are completed tap the Back key Place the original on the document glass and tap the Preview key Align the center of the original with the appropriate size mark Specify dual page copy before scanning the original To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document use the erase function This function cannot be used in combination with Center Erase To cancel dual page ...

Page 269: ... Tap the Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 269 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 270: ...paper Operation Select the paper to be used for card shot Set a paper by referring to the SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Tap the Others key and tap the Card Shot key To change the default original size during Card Shot In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Copy Setting Card Shot Settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 download...

Page 271: ...e sizes using the numeric keys To quickly set the size first specify a value close to the desired ratio value by the numeric keys then adjust it by tapping When you set the Adjust to Paper Size checkbox to the original is enlarged or reduced with the ratio appropriate to the original size To cancel the Card Shot setting Tap the Off key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sha...

Page 272: ...tart copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies Copy settings cannot be changed when scanning additional pages To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N ...

Page 273: ...opy i mages on a sheet the copy ratio is calculated automatically and the o riginal is copied Photo Repeat This function repeatedly copies on 8 1 2 x 11 A4 or 11 x 17 A 3 papers without changing the copy ratio of the photo size original Y ou can select any of the following five types of original size Original sizes up to 3 x 5 130 mm x 90 mm Original sizes up to 2 1 2 x 4 70 mm x 100 mm Original s...

Page 274: ... ORIGINAL SIZE MANUAL RATIO SELECTION SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Specify the repeat partition line After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Repeat Layout must be specified before scanning the original If the copy ratio automatically obtained in Fixed Repeat exceeds 25 to 400 it will result in an error Select the number of faces to repeat again Always place an origin...

Page 275: ... Check whether or not settings produce the required results Tap the Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more copies tap the copies display key to set a number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M...

Page 276: ...eat Number key to set a repeat count After the settings are completed tap The automatic calculation result is shown as the copy ratio Specify the repeat partition line After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence If the calculated copy ratio exceeds the range from 25 to 400 an error occurs To cancel the fixed repeat setting Tap the Off key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N...

Page 277: ...peat a photo size original in actual size Photo Repeat Tap the Others key and tap the Repeat Layout key Tap the Photo Repeat key Tap the Original key and select an original size When you tap the original size key the original direction is indicated in the Orientation Place the original to meet the displayed orientation After the settings are completed tap To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To m...

Page 278: ...ther or not settings produce the required results Tap the Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies When you tap the Original sizes up to 3 x 5 130 mm x 90 mm key on the Original screen you can select the A4 paper size only To cancel the photo repeat setting Tap the Off key To cancel all settings Tap the CA key USER S MANUAL MX M3...

Page 279: ...wo or more copies tap the copies display key to set a number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 279 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 280: ... center to create a booklet This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet Pamphlet copy using 8 original pages Binding side USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 280 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 281: ...ur When a saddle finisher is installed you can select the Staple Sort and set the Saddle Stitch Staple each set of copies at two positions in the center of paper STAPLE SORT SETTING To staple copies automatically when Pamphlet Copy is enabled From the Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Copy Setting Automatic Saddle Stitch This is used to activate Saddle Stitch automatically when Pam...

Page 282: ... Select the binding edge Tap the 1 Sided or 2 Sided key to meet the original When not inserting a cover go to step 6 When inserting a cover tap the Cover Setting key and tap the On key If the originals are 2 sided place them in the document feeder tray To cancel the pamphlet staple settings Tap the Off key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads ...

Page 283: ...per Tray key to display the tray selection screen Tap the cover input tray on the tray selection screen For more information see SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING If the cover will be copied on label sheets transparency film and tab paper cannot be used To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANU...

Page 284: ... 18 When the saddle finisher large stacker is installed 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 R A3W When the saddle finisher large stacker is installed A3 B4 A4R 8K 16KR Number of stapled sheets Max 15 sheets Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the machine Eight or 16 original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper ...

Page 285: ...over go to step 6 When inserting a cover tap the Cover Setting key and tap the On key If the originals are 2 sided place them in the document feeder tray To cancel the pamphlet staple settings Tap the Off key To change the cover input tray Tap the Paper Tray key to display the tray selection screen Tap the cover input tray on the tray selection screen USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER ...

Page 286: ...eet After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence For more information see SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING To make a copy on a cover sheet check the Make Copy on Cover Duplex box so that appears If the cover will be copied on label sheets transparency film and tab paper cannot be used To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To cancel the 2in1 4in1 setting Tap the Off key USER S...

Page 287: ...king only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 287 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 288: ...t be specified before scanning the original Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper Blank pages will be automatically added at the end if the total number of original pages is not a multiple of four This function can be combined with saddle stitch or fold if a saddle finisher is installed When the book copy function is selected 2 sided copying mode is automatically selected USE...

Page 289: ...en go to step 5 When inserting a cover tap the Cover Setting key and tap the On key To make a copy on the inserted cover sheet check the Make Copy on Cover Duplex box so that appears When settings are selected that prevent 2 sided copying the book copy function cannot be used To cancel book copy Tap the Off key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downl...

Page 290: ... of the last page and back cover facing pages To change the cover input tray Tap the Paper Tray key to display the tray selection screen Tap the cover input tray on the tray selection screen For more information see SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING If the cover will be copied on label sheets transparency film and tab paper cannot be used This setting is not available when the covers inserts fu...

Page 291: ...hen making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 291 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 292: ...ook Divide must be specified before scanning the original This function supports three original binding edges left binding right binding and top open The scanned original is split in the center The document glass is not available for this function Check the preview image displayed in the screen and make sure that the binding edge is correct USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siic...

Page 293: ...ings produce the required results Tap the Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel the Book Divide setting Tap the Off key To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 293 of 1441 3 ...

Page 294: ...Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 294 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 295: ...ocument feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS If an original of which one side is blank is scanned blank pages are skipped for 2 sided copying Depending on the original some pages that are not blank may be detected as blank pages and thus not copied and some pages that are blank may not be detected as blank and thus copied US...

Page 296: ...t copying On the confirmation screen the number of scanned original sheets appears in A the number of scanned sides in B and the number of copies excluding blank pages in C For example if five original sheets that include two blank pages are scanned by duplex scanning A will show 5 B will show 10 and C will show 8 To cancel the Blank Page Skip setting Tap the Off key To cancel all settings Tap the...

Page 297: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 297 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 298: ...s are completed tap and Back keys in sequence If user authentication is enabled you can permit each user group to use the toner save mode AUTHORITY GROUP LIST To change the toner save mode setting In Setting mode select System Settings Energy Save Toner Save Mode Toner Save Mode is not available when it is disabled in Setting mode The toner save is canceled for pattern printing PADDING UNAUTHORIZE...

Page 299: ...slide the slider to adjust the range to be suppressed After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Suppress Background must be specified before scanning the original To cancel the background suppression settings Tap the Off key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 299 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 300: ...whether or not settings produce the required results Tap the Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manua...

Page 301: ...before scanning the original If Proof Copy is executed while the machine is printing another job the job in progress is interrupted and a proof copy is printed preferentially The interrupted job will resume after proof copying has been completed However if proof copy is executed during printing of a job for which both 2 sided printing and staple function are enabled the proof copy will be printed ...

Page 302: ...eck the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results Set the number of copies number of sets using the numeric keys If the End key is tapped to execute printing of the remaining sets while the machine is printing another job the remaining sets will be printed after all previously reserved jobs are completed To cancel the proof copy setting Tap the ...

Page 303: ... results Tap the Start key Up to 999 copies sets can be set If an incorrect number of copies is set Tap the C key and enter the correct number You can also change the number of copies To change the number of copies use the numeric keys In Proof Copy unavailable function keys are not displayed Some available functions may be restricted To cancel all settings Tap the CA key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX...

Page 304: ...f the automatic document feeder AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Check the number of original sheets The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets not the number of scanned original pages For example when 2 sided copying is performed using one original the number 1 will appear to indicate that one original sheet was scanned not 2 to indicate the front side page and the reverse ...

Page 305: ...cate the front side page and the reverse side page Tap the OK key to start copying If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets Tap the Cancel key to stop the job If this function is combined with Job Build the count result is displayed after the Print Start key has been tapped USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com porta...

Page 306: ...nes must be connected to your network Even if more machines are connected to the network this function can only be used to have one other machine share a job To configure the tandem connection setting register IP address information of the slave machine in the master machine For the port number it is best to use the initial setting 50001 Unless you experience difficulty with this setting do not ch...

Page 307: ...rovided in the master machine and not provided in a slave machine a message will appear If a machine runs out of paper If either the master machine or the slave machine run out of paper the machine that ran out of paper will hold the job while the machine that still has paper continues the job When paper is added to the machine that ran out the job resumes If user authentication is specified Tande...

Page 308: ...ter machine makes more copies than the slave machine Check the preview image in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results Tap the Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel the tandem copy setting Tap the Tandem Copy key to uncheck it If an incorrect number of copies is set Tap the C ke...

Page 309: ...l Tandem Copy Tap the STOP keys on both the master and slave machines USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 309 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 310: ...chine conditions In such a case adjust the contrast by selecting the Hidden Pattern Print Setting from the Setting mode When copying an output sheet with a pattern print the hidden pattern may not emerge depending on settings other than Hidden Pattern Print The hidden pattern may not emerge on copies in cases where certain types of devices or certain setting conditions are used to copy an output s...

Page 311: ... in the Print Contents Setting tab as required To specify print settings you can select the required one from pre set text or use the soft keyboard You can also print serial number and account job ID After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence We recommend you to select the Character stand out option for the Print Method To cancel the pattern print setting Tap the Off key USER S...

Page 312: ... Contents Setting tab The pattern print preview may slightly differ from the actual pattern and exposure as the preview is used for simple pattern checking To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 3...

Page 313: ...is specified together with another image compositing function trace information is printed at the top Trace information is printed at the top or bottom outside an image frame The information added at printing or the preview image of the account job ID and date time are displayed as shown below Account job ID 00000 Date time MM DD YYYY hh mm USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siic...

Page 314: ...ou wish to bind the copies with a string or in a binder Shifting the image to the right so the copies can be bound at the left edge Not using the Margin Shift Using the Margin Shift Staple positions USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 314 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 315: ...n shift setting In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Copy Setting Initial Margin Shift Setting Tap the numeric value display indicating the margin shift area on the front side or reverse side and enter the area using the numeric keys To quickly set the area first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys then adjust it with If you set the Adjust 2nd pg value to...

Page 316: ... set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel the margin shift setting Tap the Off key To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 316 o...

Page 317: ...on Using the erase function Erase modes If a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting the erase width will change according to the selected ratio This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M...

Page 318: ...cording to the selected ratio If the erase width setting is 1 20 mm and the image is reduced to 50 the erase width will be 1 2 10 mm To change the default erase width setting In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Copy Setting Erase Width Adjustment The factory default setting is 2 5 10 mm The default margin shift setting can be set from 0 to 1 0 mm to 20 mm The factory default setti...

Page 319: ...pposite to the erased edge on the front side will be erased If the Reverse erase position of back face checkbox is set to the edge in the same position as on the front side will be erased Tap the numeric value display indicating the margin shift area on the front side or reverse side and enter the area using the numeric keys To quickly set the area first specify a value close to the desired value ...

Page 320: ...king only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 320 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 321: ...3W paper into the bypass tray Pull out the extension guide adjust it to the width of 12 x 18 A3W paper and place the paper on the bypass tray After loading 12 x 18 A3W paper into the bypass tray configure the bypass tray settings as explained in MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY The 12 x 18 A3 full bleed copy must be specified before scanning the original The staple and punch functions cannot be...

Page 322: ... key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 322 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 323: ...on the icon After the settings are completed tap the Back key Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass Centering must be specified before scanning the original When the original size or the paper size is displayed as a special size this function cannot be used To cancel the centering setting ...

Page 324: ...start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 324 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 325: ...Position Image must be specified before scanning the original Tap the area indicating the movement distance on the front or reverse side and enter the distance using numeric keys To quickly set the area first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys then adjust it with If you set the Adjust 2nd pg value to 1st checkbox to goes out and USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N ...

Page 326: ...age in the preview screen Check whether or not settings produce the required results Tap the Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies you can set sides 1 and 2 separately To cancel the Position Image setting Tap the Clear key To cancel all settings Tap the CA key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa...

Page 327: ...ore sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 327 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 328: ...iginals are copied as a single job you are saved the trouble of sorting the copies that would be required if the originals were divided into separate copy jobs When scanning originals in sets divide the sheets so that no set has more than the number of paper that can be loaded and then scan from the set with the first page The individual copy settings can be configured for each set of originals to...

Page 329: ...l Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray Originals can be stacked up to the indicator line AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER will be impeded Delete unnecessary files from the Quick File Folder The Job Build mode cannot be combined with other functions Dual Page Copy Book Copy Card shot Multi Page Enlargement 12 x 18 A3 full bleed copy Repeat layout To cancel the job build mode Tap ...

Page 330: ...ging copy settings Copy exposure paper size type etc tap the Change the settings of the original to be scanned next key For more information see Changing the copy settings for each set of originals When scanning the next original without changing any settings go to step 5 To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of co...

Page 331: ...e Tap Change the settings of the original to be scanned next on the action panel and set the checkbox to Change copy settings Place the next set of originals and tap the Additionally Scan key Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 331 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 332: ...propriate for that size When mixed size original is combined with auto ratio selection the ratio is adjusted individually for each original according to the selected paper size enabling printing on a uniform paper size When mixed size original is combined with auto ratio selection Auto ratio selection and 11 x 17 A3 are selected There are two settings for mixed size originals USER S MANUAL MX M365...

Page 333: ... 2 x 14 11 x 17 and 8 1 2 x 13 11 x 17 and 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A3 and B4 A3 and B5 B4 and A4 A4 and B5 B4 and A4R B4 and A5 B5 and A4R B5 and A5 Operation Mixed Size Original must be specified before scanning the original When Different Width is selected 2 Sided to 2 Sided and 2 Sided to 1 Sided of automatic two sided copying can be used When Different Width is selected the staple function cannot be use...

Page 334: ...in the document feeder tray and tap the Preview key Place the original as shown on the Mixed Size Original screen Tap the Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel the mixed size original setting Tap the Off key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M...

Page 335: ...ore sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 335 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 336: ...iginal in the document feeder tray of the automatic document Slow Scan Mode must be specified before scanning the original The 2 Side to 2 Side and 2 Side to 1 Side modes of automatic 2 sided copying cannot be used To always scan the original in the slow scan mode In Setting mode select System Settings Device Control Original Feeding Mode To cancel slow scan mode Tap the Slow Scan Mode key to clea...

Page 337: ...to specify the number of copies If the originals are inserted with too much force they may crumple and misfeed To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 337 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 338: ...he settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of Resolution must be specified before scanning...

Page 339: ...r more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 339 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 340: ... above can be printed on the header or footer of each sheet If the selected stamp content of one position overlaps the stamp content of another position priority will be given in the following order watermark right side left side center Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting Text will ...

Page 341: ... each page when compiling Covers Inserts Use the stamp settings to select whether or not the item is printed on inserte d covers and inserts Operation Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the Others key and tap the Stamp key Tap a tab to be pri...

Page 342: ...lts Tap the Start key to start copying When you tap the tab the display tab is switched Tapping the Detail key allows you to configure setting for each tab Tapping the Layout key allows you to check the printing position or detailed settings To cancel the text settings Tap the Cancel All key To cancel all settings Tap the CA key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa c...

Page 343: ...pping the Pre Set Select key allows you to select the required one of the registered formats for printing Tapping the Store Delete key allows you to edit delete or store pre set text To edit or store pre set text use the soft keyboard To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com...

Page 344: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 344 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 345: ...inter driver to the machine For information about how to register an image see REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE User s Manual A custom stamp image is copied by sheet not by original If 2in1 4in1 is enabled user stamps are copied for each set of pages A custom stamp image is copied with the registered size The size remains unchanged even when the copy ratio is enlarged or reduc...

Page 346: ...verse Prints an image as normal without B W reverse However the following conditio n is set when printed on a dark background Custom stamp Printed in white Custom watermark Printed without being whitened A different custom image cannot be specified for each page If an image runs off of the specified paper depending on the registered size or position the excess will not be copied Custom Image can b...

Page 347: ... Book Divide Makes a stamp copy by sheet Operation Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the Others key and tap the Custom Image key Tap the Custom Stamp or Custom Watermark key Tap the Image key to select an image Select the required thumbnail ...

Page 348: ... 90 degre es or 180 degrees For custom watermark Print Pattern Specify the image watermark print pattern Transparent Makes an original image transparent for stamp cop y Overlap Hides a watermark added to an original image for stamp copy Exposure Select the exposure of a watermark from nine levels Print Page Specify a page s for stamp copy First Page or All Pages Print Position Specify a position f...

Page 349: ...I O N Specify the original orientation 2 S id e d O ri gi n Specify the binding edge for 2 sided original Book or Tablet USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 349 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 350: ...ired results Tap the Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel the Custom Image setting Tap the Off key To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 down...

Page 351: ...ver inserting examples The following shows the copy results when front and back covers are inserted into six 1 sided original pages or three 2 sided original pages in the four copy modes below Copy modes 1 sided copying of 1 sided originals 2 sided copying of 1 sided originals 1 sided copying of 2 sided originals 2 sided copying of 2 sided originals When inserting insertion sheets see INSERTING IN...

Page 352: ...ts a back cover at the end of copie s 2 SIDED COPY Not copied Makes a 2 sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover and inserts a back cover at the end of copies Not copied 1 sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies and makes a 1 sided copy on the sixth original page for ba ck cover Not copied 2 SIDED COPY USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S htt...

Page 353: ...Y 1 sided copy Makes a 2 sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover and also makes a 1 sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover 2 SIDED COPY 2 SIDED COPY Makes a 2 sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover and also makes a 2 sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover 2 sided copying of 1 sided originals Setting conditi...

Page 354: ... 1 sided copy is made on the fifth original page Not copied 2 SIDED COPY Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies and makes a 2 sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pa ges for back cover 1 sided copy 1 sided copy Makes a 1 sided copy on the first original page for fro nt cover and also makes a 1 sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover 1 sided copy 2 SIDED COPY Makes a 1 ...

Page 355: ...ed copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover 1 sided copying of 2 sided originals Setting conditions for each cover Resulting copies Front cover Back cover Not copied Not copied Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end of copi es 1 sided copy Not copied Makes a 1 sided copy on the first original page for fro nt cover and inserts a back cover at the end of copie s 2 SIDED COPY ...

Page 356: ...ed copy Makes a 1 sided copy on the first original page for fro nt cover and also makes a 1 sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover 1 sided copy 2 SIDED COPY Makes a 1 sided copy on the first original page for fro nt cover and also makes a 2 sided copy on the fifth a nd sixth original pages for back cover 2 SIDED COPY 1 sided copy Makes a 2 sided copy on the first and second original ...

Page 357: ...1 sided copy on the first original page for fro nt cover and inserts a back cover at the end of copie s The second original page is not copied 2 SIDED COPY Not copied Makes a 2 sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover and inserts a back cover at the end of copies Not copied 1 sided copy Inserts a front cover at the beginning of copies and makes a 1 sided copy on the sixth ...

Page 358: ...s a 2 sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover and also makes a 1 sided copy on the sixth original page for back cover The fifth original page is not copied 2 SIDED COPY 2 SIDED COPY Makes a 2 sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover and also makes a 2 sided copy on the fifth and sixth original pages for back cover Before using the covers inserts f...

Page 359: ...ure to select covers inserts One sheet can be inserted for each of front and back covers When performing 2 sided copying of 2 sided originals an insertion sheet cannot be inserted between the front and reverse sides of an original This function cannot be used in combination with the saddle stitch function This setting is not available when the covers inserts function is disabled in Setting mode US...

Page 360: ...e input tray setting screen tap the Paper Tray key of Front Cover or Back Cover For more information see SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING If the cover will be copied on label sheets transparency film and tab paper cannot be used If not copied on tab paper can be inserted To cancel cover sheet insertion Tap the Off key To cancel the front cover back cover and insertion sheet settings at the sam...

Page 361: ...o not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 361 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 362: ...after page 5 Sheet inserting examples The following examples show the copy results when insertion sheets are inserted into six 1 sided originals or three 2 sided originals using two copy modes described below Copy modes 1 sided original copying 2 sided original copying 1 sided original copying When inserting covers see INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http...

Page 363: ...rtion sheet 2 SIDED COPY Makes a 2 sided copy of the third and four th original pages on an insertion sheet 2 sided original copying Insertion sheet setting conditi ons Resulting copies Insert an insertion sheet in 1 sided co py mode Insert an insertion sheet in 2 sided copy mode Not copied Inserts an insertion sheet between the se cond and third pages of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX ...

Page 364: ...ings When these settings have been completed perform the procedure to select covers inserts The insertion sheet size must be the same as the copy size Up to 100 insertion sheets can be inserted The document glass is not available for this function Note that two insertion sheets cannot be inserted into the same page When performing 2 sided copying of 2 sided originals an insertion sheet cannot be i...

Page 365: ...er key The total number of insertion sheets is displayed at the side of Enter key Repeat these steps for the number of insertion sheets After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence If you have entered an incorrect insert page number Tap the Page Layout key and change the page CHECKING EDITING AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETS To cancel inserting insertio...

Page 366: ...ertion sheet Tap the Paper Tray key and select the tray with insertion sheets loaded When copying on both sides of an insertion sheet you cannot use label sheets transparency films or tab paper for insertion If not copied on tab paper can be inserted USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 366 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 367: ...art copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 367 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 368: ...editing contents are different between the registered covers and insertion sheets as shown below For the cover you can change settings such as the paper type copy do not copy 1 Sided and 2 Sided For insertion sheet you can change only the page number you want to insert an insert sheet into If the settings for the covers or insertion sheets are not configured the Page Layout key is disabled USER S ...

Page 369: ...n change the page number you want to insert an insert sheet into After the settings are completed tap the key multiple times to return to the Others screen Then tap the Back key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 369 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 370: ... to copy on insertion sheets Operation Place the transparency film face down in the bypass tray and load transparency film sheets After loading the transparency film configure the bypass tray settings MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY When performing 2 sided copying only 2 side to 1 side mode can be used The number of copies cannot be selected in this mode Transparency film can only be placed in...

Page 371: ...y and tap the Transparency Inserts key Tap the On key When making a copy on insertion sheets tap the Also Make Copy on Inserts checkbox to set to After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence To cancel the transparency inserts setting Tap the Off key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 371 of 1441 3 17 2016...

Page 372: ...king only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 372 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 373: ... originals for tab captions Relation between the originals and the tab paper Tab copying with a left binding Originals Placing the originals Loading tab paper Tab copying with a right binding USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 373 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 374: ...ttings Copy Setting Initial Tab Copy Setting The default image shift width can be set from 0 to 5 8 0 mm to 20 mm The factory default setting is 1 2 10 mm Tap the numeric value display indicating the image shift width and enter a shift width using numeric keys To quickly set the area first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys then adjust it with USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX ...

Page 375: ...ngs as explained in MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass To cancel the tag copy setting Tap the Off key The width of the tab paper can be as wide as 8 1 2 x 11 paper 8 1 2 plus 5 8 or A4 width 210 mm plus 20 mm USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N U...

Page 376: ...start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 376 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 377: ...of sections of image There will be a margin around the edges of each copy Areas for overlapping the copies will be created at the leading and trailing edges of each copy The paper size number of sheets required for the enlarged image and the ratio are automatically selected based on the selected original size and enlargement size The paper size and ratio cannot be selected manually USER S MANUAL M...

Page 378: ... original on the document glass based on the orientation displayed on the screen and tap the Preview key When printing the copy image and margin border set the Print Paste Position Mark checkbox to To cancel the multi page enlargement setting Tap the Clear key Although the multi page enlargement setting is canceled the ratio selected automatically is kept valid To return the ratio to 100 Tap the C...

Page 379: ...art copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 379 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 380: ...ap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen Specify the Mirror Image before scanning an original To cancel the mirror image setting Tap the Mirror Image key to clear the checkmark USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http ...

Page 381: ... only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 381 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 382: ...e settings are completed tap the Back key Place the original and tap the Preview key Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass B W Reverse must be specified before scanning the original When this function is selected the Original Image Type setting for exposure adjustment automatically changes to Text To cancel B W reverse Tap the B W ...

Page 383: ...start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 383 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 384: ...harpness key Tap or slide the slider to adjust the sharpness After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Sharpness must be specified before scanning the original To cancel the sharpness setting Tap the Off key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 384 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 385: ...Tap the Start key to start copying When making only one set of copies you do not need to specify the number of copies To cancel all settings Tap the CA key To make two or more sets of copies Tap the copies display key to specify the number of copies USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 385 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 386: ...jobs or to perform priority processing see the following items STOPPING DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 386 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 387: ...1 x 17 A3 size CAD drawings are reduced to 8 1 2 x 11 A4 size To reduce paper use by half 2 sided copying is used Margin shift is used to allow a margin to punch holes for filing When a job program is not stored When a job program is stored Sets 11 x 17 A3 to 8 1 2 x 11 A4 r eduction Changes the exposure setting Sets 2 sided copying Sets margins Sets punch hole settings Selects copy settings Tap t...

Page 388: ...be stored Tap the Program Registration key on the action panel Tap a key not used yet for program registration A key with a program stored is displayed in color Tap a key with no program stored Up to 48 programs can be stored Program settings remains registered even when the main power has been turned off A program can also be stored in a home page or bookmark as a shortcut therefore it is helpful...

Page 389: ...abled a shortcut of the program is registered in the user s home page or bookmark If user authentication is disabled the administrator password entry screen appears When the administrator password is entered the registration is completed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 389 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 390: ...The number of copies cannot be stored USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 390 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 391: ...lect a program key and tap the Add to Bookmark or Register in Home key on the action panel You can then register the selected program as a shortcut in bookmark or home page USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 391 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 392: ...he action panel Tap the Delete key on the action panel A program that is already stored cannot be deleted When System Settings in Setting mode Copy Settings Copy Setting Disabling of Registration Deletion of Program is selected a registered program cannot be deleted or renamed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 392 of 1441...

Page 393: ...e action panel Tap the Change Name key on the action panel Tap the key of the required program and rename the program Then tap the OK key After the settings are completed tap USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 393 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 394: ...must be used Macintosh environment Printer driver type PS This printer driver supports the PostScript 3TM page description language developed by Adobe Syst ems Incorporated and uses a PPD file To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Windows environment see 2 SETUP IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT in the Software Setup Guide The User s Manual mainly uses PCL6 printer driver screens to exp...

Page 395: ...3 SETUP IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT in the Software Setup Guide USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 395 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 396: ...utton that is used to open the printer driver properties window usually Property or Print Settings may vary depending on the application The machine name that normally appears in the Printer menu is MX xxxx xxxx is a sequence of characters that varies depending on the machine model In Windows XP Server 2003 Vista select Print from the File menu USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http ...

Page 397: ...lication You can register up to seven user defined sizes in the pull down menu To store a paper size select Custom Paper or one of User 1 to User 7 from the pull down menu and click the Custom button To select settings on other tabs click the desired tab and then select the settings Click a tab on the Print dialog box to adjust the settings on that tab USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER...

Page 398: ...Click the OK button to execute printing USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 398 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 399: ...ter driver to be used from the list Select the paper settings and click the OK button Set the paper size paper orientation and copy ratio The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application The machine name that normally appears in the Printer menu is SCxxxxxx xxxxxx is a sequence of characters that varies depending on the machine model USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N ...

Page 400: ... click the Print button In Mac OS X 10 4 click next to Copies Pages and select the settings that you wish to configure from the pull down menu The corresponding setting USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 400 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 401: ...S X 10 5 10 6 10 7 and 10 8 if the settings do not appear click next to the printer name USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 401 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 402: ...nformation ask your administrator If you have configured Printing Policy on the Options tab so that user authentication is always performed users are required to be authenticated for each print job The machine s user authentication function cannot be used when the PPD driver is installed and the Windows standard PS printer driver is used For this reason the machine can be configured to prohibit us...

Page 403: ...lick the User Name checkbox and enter your user name using up to 32 characters The entered user name will appear on the touch panel of the machine If you do not enter a user name your PC login name will appear Click the Job Name checkbox and enter a job name using up to 80 If you have configured Printing Policy on the Options tab so that user authentication is always performed user information can...

Page 404: ...file name set in the application will appear Click the OK button to execute printing To have a confirmation window appear before printing starts select the Auto Job Control Review checkbox USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 404 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 405: ...n authentication is carried out using the user number enter your user number 5 to 8 digits in User Number The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application The machine name that normally appears in the Printer menu is SCxxxxxx xxxxxx is a sequence of characters that varies depending on the machine model The number of pages printed is added to the Other User count In this case...

Page 406: ...Enter a job name using up to 32 characters The entered job name will appear as a file name on the touch panel of the machine If you do not enter a job name the file name set in the application will appear In Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 10 7 and 10 8 select Job Handling and click the Login tab USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 406 ...

Page 407: ...ng your login name and password or user number to simplify operation the next time you wish to print based on the same user authentication USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 407 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 408: ... of the machine check that paper of that type is actually loaded into the bypass tray and then select the appropriate paper type When Paper Type in Paper Selection is set to Auto Select A tray with plain paper or recycled paper of the size specified in Paper Size is automatically selected The factory default setting is plain paper only When Paper Type in Paper Selection is set to anything other th...

Page 409: ...pass tray To exclude the bypass tray from the trays that can be selected when Auto Select is selected In Setting mode select System Settings Printer Settings Default Settings Bypass Tray Settings Exclude Bypass Tray from Auto Paper Select If special media are frequently loaded in the bypass tray it is recommended that this setting be enabled USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http sii...

Page 410: ...fied in Paper Size on the page setup screen is used for printing Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray see LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY When Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray disabled by factory default or Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray enabled by factory default which you can reach by s...

Page 411: ...ypass Tray Settings Exclude Bypass Tray from Auto Paper Select USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 411 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 412: ...ABLE PAPER TYPES For the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray see LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY For more information on the procedure for loading paper see PAPER FEEDING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT It is recommended that you carry out a test print to check the print result before using an envelope When using media such as envelopes that can be loaded only in a specific orientation you ...

Page 413: ...menu Set the paper type of the bypass tray to Envelope and load an envelope into the bypass tray USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 413 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 414: ... the procedure for loading paper in the bypass tray see LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY For more information on the procedure for loading paper see PAPER FEEDING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT When using media such as envelopes that can be loaded only in a specific orientation you can rotate the image 180 degrees For more information see ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES Rotate 180 degrees It is...

Page 415: ...nvelope from the All pages from menu Set the paper type of the bypass tray to Envelope and load an envelope into the bypass tray USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 415 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 416: ...n Operation Select the machine s printer driver from the print window of the application and click the Detail button Click the Help button The Help window will open to let you view explanations of the settings on the tab To view Help for settings in a dialog box click the underlined text at the top of the Help window To view Help for a setting in Windows XP Server 2003 click the button in the uppe...

Page 417: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 417 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 418: ... Select the machine s printer driver from the print window of the application and click the Detail button Configure the print settings on each tab and click the Save button Check the displayed settings Enter a name for the settings using up to 20 characters and click the OK Deleting saved settings In step 2 of USING SAVED SETTINGS select the user settings that you want to delete and click the Dele...

Page 419: ...button USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 419 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 420: ...nt window of the application and click the Detail button Select the user settings that you wish to use and click the OK button Start printing The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window usually Property or Print Preferences may vary depending on the application USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 42...

Page 421: ...tton and then click Control Panels and then Printer In Windows XP Server 2003 click the Start button and then click Printers and Faxes In Windows 8 right click in the startup window or swipe upward from the bottom edge then click the App Bar All apps Control Panel Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers In Windows XP if Printers and Faxes does not appear in the Start menu select Control Panels sel...

Page 422: ...ndows Vista click the Organize menu and then click Properties In Windows XP Server 2003 click the File menu and then click Properties In Windows XP Server 2003 Vista click the Printing Preferences button on the General tab USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 422 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 423: ... text or a table High Quality The print quality of photos and text is high Fine Select this mode to print photos more clearly or graphic gradation images more finely Operation Windows Click the Advanced tab and select Print Mode USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 423 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 424: ...ided Tablet Short edged bindin g Landscape 2 Sided Book Short edged binding 2 Sided Tablet Long edged bindin g The pages are printed so that they can be bo und at the left or right side The pages are printed so that they c an be bound at the top Operation Windows Click the Main tab and select 2 Sided Book or 2 Sided Tablet If necessary you can select the method of implementing 2 sided printing Cli...

Page 425: ...g or Short edged binding Compatibility button on the Advanced tab and select the mode from 2 Sided Printing Mode USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 425 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 426: ...ollowing example explains how to print a letter size document on ledger size paper Windows Click the Paper tab and select the paper size for the print image for example Letter Select Fit To Paper Size and select the actual paper size to be used for printing for example Legal When you are using the PCL6 printer driver documents can be received so that they are printed to fit A0 A1 or A2 size paper ...

Page 427: ...ge size use the Paper Size menu that appears when Page Setup is selected Select Scale to fit paper size and select the actual paper size to be used for printing for example Ledger USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 427 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 428: ...aper When used in combination with 2 sided printing this function saves more paper N Up Pages per she et Print results Left To Right Right To Left Top To Bottom When the print orientation is landsc ape 2 Up 2 pages per she et N Up Pages per sh eet Upper Left To Right Upper Left To B ottom Upper Right T o Left Upper Right To Bottom 4 Up 4 pages p er sheet Note the following when printing multiple p...

Page 429: ...be printed on a single sheet is 2 4 6 9 or 16 Printing 8 pages on one sheet is not supported The function for printing only the first page in the original size can be used only when the PCL6 printer driver is installed When you are using the PCL6 printer driver you can print multiple pages on one sheet without changing the original size Click the Compatibility button on the Advanced tab and click ...

Page 430: ...Printing select the number of images per sheet and click the OK button Macintosh Select Layout and select the number of pages per sheet Select the order of the pages If you wish to print borderlines select the desired type of borderline USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 430 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 431: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 431 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 432: ...Advanced tab Click the Disable Blank Page Print checkbox to set it to This function is available in Windows environments Depending on the state of the original some pages that are not blank may be detected as blank pages and thus not printed or some pages that are blank may not be detected as blank and thus printed In N Up Print blank pages are not excluded and are printed USER S MANUAL MX M365N M...

Page 433: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 433 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 434: ...r stapled materials The stapling positions and the number of staples can be selected to obtain the following stapling results Staple Left Right Top 1 Staple 2 Staples The staple orientation or varies depending on the size and orientation of the paper Punch function The punch function punches holes in the output The punch hole positions are set by selecting the binding edge USER S MANUAL MX M365N M...

Page 435: ...at can be stapled at once includes any covers and or inserts that are inserted For information on the saddle stitch function see CREATE A STAPLED PAMPHLET Pamphlet copy saddle stitch The staple and offset shifting the position of the paper that is output for each job functions cannot be used simultaneously When the finisher is disabled in the machine s settings the staple function and punch functi...

Page 436: ... select Binding Edge Select the staple function or the punch function Select the number of staples For the punch function click the Punch checkbox so that the checkmark appears USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 436 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 437: ...ly folds and outputs the copies This is convenient when you wish to compile printed output into a pamphlet Operation Windows Click the Main tab and select Pamphlet Style Select the printing method for the pamphlet style from the pull down menu The selections are Tiled Pamphlet Pamphlet Style 2 Up Multiple Pamphlet Style Actual Size and Multiple Pamphlet Style 2 Up USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N M...

Page 438: ...phlet or 2 Up Pamphlet When Multiple Pamphlet Style Actual Size is selected paper twice the size specified in the application is used for printing When Multiple Pamphlet Style 2 Up is selected the paper size specified in the application is reduced as done in the 2 Up mode and paper of the size specified in the application is used for printing USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http si...

Page 439: ... you wish to staple or punch the output but the binding area overlaps the text Operation Windows Click the Main tab and select Binding Edge Select Margin Shift Select from the Margin Shift menu If you wish to configure another numeric setting select the setting from the pull down menu and click the Settings button Click buttons or directly enter the number USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N ...

Page 440: ...h Select Printer Features and select Binding Edge Select Margin Shift USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 440 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 441: ...ation Windows Click the Paper tab Click the Poster Printing checkbox so that the checkmark appears and click the Poster Settings button From the pull down menu select the number of sheets of paper to be used If you wish to print borderlines and or use the overlap function click the corresponding checkboxes so that the checkmark appears This function is available in a Windows environment This funct...

Page 442: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 442 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 443: ...ation Windows Click the Advanced tab and click the Compatibility button Click the Print Position button Configure the print start positions for odd and even pages respectively and click the OK button This function is available in a Windows environment USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 443 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 444: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 444 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 445: ...be loaded in only one orientation such as envelopes or paper with punch holes Operation Windows Click the Main tab Select the Rotate 180 degrees checkbox to set to In Mac OS X a portrait image cannot be rotated 180 degrees USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 445 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 446: ...ect Page Setup from the File menu and click the button Click the OK button USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 446 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 447: ... image or add margins to the paper by slightly reducing an image Operation Windows Click the Paper tab Select Zoom and click the Settings button From the pull down menu select the actual paper size to be used for printing Enter the percentage By clicking the button you can specify the value in increments of 1 In addition select Upper Left or Center for the base point on the paper USER S MANUAL MX ...

Page 448: ...ect Page Setup from the File menu and enter the ratio Click the OK button USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 448 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 449: ...ttings pull down menu This function is available in a Windows environment This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used The units of line width adjustment can be set to Fixed Width or Ratio Click the Compatibility button and select the units from the Line Width Unit menu To print all line data in the minimum line width click the Compatibility button and click the Print in the Mini...

Page 450: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 450 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 451: ...ng medium Operation Windows Click the Advanced tab If you wish to reverse the image horizontally select Horizontal If you wish to reverse the image vertically select Vertical In a Windows environment this function is only available when using the PS printer driver USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 451 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 ...

Page 452: ... If you wish to reverse the image horizontally select Flip horizontally checkbox If you wish to reverse the image vertically select Reverse page orientation checkbox USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 452 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 453: ... even if image editing software is not installed on your computer Operation Windows Click the Advanced tab and click the Image Adjustment button Drag the slide bar or click the and buttons to adjust the image In a Macintosh environment this function is only available when using Mac OS X 10 4 USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365...

Page 454: ...ab Select the Text To Black checkbox and or the Vector To Black checkbox When Text To Black is selected all text other than white text is printed in black When Vector To Black is selected all vector graphics other than white lines and areas are printed in black Raster data such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted This function is available in a Windows environment USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N M...

Page 455: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 455 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 456: ...ly registered text in the list When necessary you can enter text to create an original watermark Operation Windows Click the Watermarks tab and select Watermark Click the Edit button to edit the font and select other detailed settings To create a watermark enter the text of the watermark in the Text box and click the Add button USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa co...

Page 457: ...nfigure detailed watermark settings such as selection of the text and editing of the font Adjust the size and angle of the text by dragging the slide bar USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 457 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 458: ... Click the Watermarks tab and select Image Stamp If an image stamp has already been stored it can be selected from the pull down menu If you have not stored an image stamp click the Image File select the file you wish to use for the image stamp and click the Add button This function is available in a Windows environment This function can be used when the PCL6 or PS printer driver is used USER S MA...

Page 459: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 459 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 460: ...or complex manipulations Operation Windows Creating an overlay file Open the driver properties window from the application that is used for creating overlay data Click the Advanced tab and click the Edit button in Overlays Click the Create Overlay button and specify the name and folder to be used for the overlay file that you wish to create This function is available in a Windows environment USER ...

Page 461: ...select Overlays A previously created or stored overlay file can be selected from the pull down menu When printing is started a confirmation message will appear The overlay file will not be created until the Yes button is clicked When you click the Store button the existing overlay file is registered USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals...

Page 462: ...sary paper can be inserted as insertion sheets where nothing is printed In a Macintosh environment The front and back covers are printed using paper that is different from the other pages This function can be used for example when you want to print only the front cover and last page on thick paper Operation Windows Click the Special Modes tab Select Different Paper and click the Settings button Se...

Page 463: ...per in the bypass tray When Other Page is selected for Insert Position specify the insert position by directly entering a page number However inserts cannot be successively inserted at the same page When Printing Method is set to 2 Sided Print the specified page and the next page after it will be printed on the front and reverse side of the paper and thus an insert setting at a page printed on the...

Page 464: ...lect the cover insertion settings Select the print setting paper tray and paper type for the front and back covers USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 464 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 465: ...on Windows Click the Special Modes tab Select Transparency Inserts and click the Settings button Select the transparency insert settings When the Printed checkbox is selected to set to the same content as that printed on the transparency film is also printed on the insert Select the paper source and type if needed Transparency film must be loaded in the bypass tray Set the paper type of the bypass...

Page 466: ...erts the same content as that printed on the transparency film is also printed on the insert Select the paper source and type if needed Set the paper type of the bypass tray to OHP and load transparency film into the bypass USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 466 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 467: ...tray USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 467 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 468: ...ip is obtained with a single selection of the print command If plain paper is loaded into tray 1 and recycled paper is loaded into tray 2 as necessary selecting Carbon Copy simultaneously prints one copy for presentation and one copy as a duplicate Operation Windows Click the Special Modes tab Select Carbon Copy and click the Settings button This function is available in a Windows environment USER...

Page 469: ...select the tray for the carbon copy from Carbon Copy When the bypass tray is selected be sure to select the Paper Type USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 469 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 470: ...ndow The text is printed on the tabs Tab Paper Print for PCL6 only Tab sheets are printed while they are inserted between the desired pages In Tab Paper Print on the Special Modes tab of the printer driver properties window enter the text that you wish to print on the tabs Specify the detailed settings such as the size of the tabs the starting position the distance between tabs and the page number...

Page 471: ...ue or by clicking the button Select the paper source and type Click the Paper tab and select Bypass Tray for Paper Source and Tab Paper for Paper Type These functions are available in a Windows environment Tab paper must be loaded into the bypass tray Set the paper type of the bypass tray to Tab Paper and load tab papers into the bypass tray USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http sii...

Page 472: ...rtical dimensions of the tab can be directly entered or changed using the button In addition select the size of the tab paper from Paper Size Select the page settings Specify the pages where you wish to insert tab paper and enter the text that you wish to print on the tabs Also select the font and adjust the layout Set the paper type of the bypass tray to Tab Paper and load tab papers into the byp...

Page 473: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 473 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 474: ...as page settings Back is blank Operation Windows Click the Special Modes tab Select Chapter Inserts and click the Settings button Enter the page numbers that are to begin chapters in Page Setup and click This function is available in a Windows environment This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used You need to set Document Style on the Main tab to 2 Sided Book or 2 Sided Tablet ...

Page 475: ...rmation When you have finished selecting settings click the Save button in User Settings to save the settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 475 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 476: ...he desired folding method from Fold This function cannot be used when System Settings in Setting mode Device Control Disabling of Duplex is selected When printing data that is in a pamphlet layout the Multi Sheet Fold Staple function can be used to conveniently fold and staple printed output to create a pamphlet USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 down...

Page 477: ...nter Features Select Paper Folding Settings and select the desired folding method USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 477 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 478: ... Click the Special Modes tab Select Page Interleave and click the Settings button This function is available in a Windows environment This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used You have to create page data to be inserted in advance For the procedure for creating page data see Creating an overlay file in OVERLAY A FIXED FORM ON THE PRINT DATA USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M...

Page 479: ... the overlay data to be inserted and set its insertion position USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 479 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 480: ...odes tab Select Layout Print and click the Settings button Select Repeat Print In N Up Printing select the number of images per sheet and click the OK button This function is available in a Windows environment This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 480 of 1441 3 17...

Page 481: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 481 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 482: ... Advanced tab Select the Hidden Pattern Print checkbox so that the checkmark appears then click the Settings button Configure the settings for hidden pattern printing and click the OK button This function is available in a Windows environment This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used The hidden pattern printing function cannot be used when Print Mode is set to Ultra Fine USER ...

Page 483: ...under certain machine conditions In Setting mode select Security Settings Hidden Pattern Print Setting Contrast if this is the case The hidden pattern may not emerge on copies with certain types of devices or under certain setting conditions used to copy an output sheet with a pattern print USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N...

Page 484: ...ect whether the images are rendered in the printer driver or the machine Operation Windows Click the Advanced tab and click the Compatibility button Click the Use driver to render JPEGs checkbox so that the checkmark appears Click the OK button This function is available in a Windows environment When images are rendered in the printer driver it may take time until the printing is completed USER S ...

Page 485: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 485 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 486: ...seudo enhanced resolution Operation Windows Click the Advanced tab and click the Compatibility button Select the Smoothing checkbox so that the checkmark appears Click the OK button This function is available in a Windows environment USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 486 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 487: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 487 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 488: ...achine configured in System Settings in Setting mode Device Control Tandem Connection Setting must be registered in the printer driver In a Windows environment this is accomplished automatically by clicking the Auto Configuration button on the Options tab of the printer driver In a Macintosh environment this is accomplished automatically by clicking the Tandem Settings button In a Macintosh enviro...

Page 489: ...llation with LPR Direct Print Specify Address Auto Search selected and with the Yes checkbox selected for Do you want to use the tandem print function To use the tandem print function you must select the protocol to be used in accordance with the message that appears on the screen when you add the printer driver in the Printer Setup Utility USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siic...

Page 490: ... job on the machine s hard drive without printing it Hold After Print This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine s hard drive after it is printed Sample Print When a print job is sent to the machine only the first set of copies is printed After checking the contents of the first set of copies you can print the remaining sets from the operation panel of the machine This prevents the oc...

Page 491: ...ings When you have selected Custom Folder click the Stored to button to select For the procedure for printing files stored on the machine s hard drive see FILE PRINTING in DOCUMENT FILING When printing from a PC you can set a password 5 to 8 digits to maintain the confidentiality of information in a stored file When a password is set the password must be entered to print data USER S MANUAL MX M365...

Page 492: ...on Settings is cleared If necessary you can select the data format from CMYK and RGB for data to be stored in the machine Click the Compatibility button on the Advanced tab and select the format from Rip Format To store a file in a custom folder you must first create the custom folder using System Settings in Setting mode Document Filing Control If you have set a password for the custom folder ent...

Page 493: ...ormat To store a file in a custom folder you must first create the custom folder using System Settings in Settings Document Filing Control If you have set a password for the custom folder enter the password in Folder Password on the folder selection screen In Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 10 7 and 10 8 if you wish to store the document filing settings in a custom folder click the Custom Folder tab USER S MAN...

Page 494: ...ode select System Settings Default Settings and enable Automatically print stored jobs after login At the time of retention print in addition to the user authentication information enter the user name stored in the machine in User Name of Default Job ID in the printer driver Using this function in a Windows environment PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT WHEN USER AUTHENTICATION IS USED Using this f...

Page 495: ...ick file folder main folder and custom folder will be printed automatically and then deleted USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 495 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 496: ...nd the data and click the Add button to add the address to the Destination Addresses must be stored in advance in the machine For more information see STORING CONTACTS You must complete the preparatory steps for using each sending function of the machine For more information see the explanation of each sending function This function is available in a Windows environment This function can be used w...

Page 497: ...click the Delete button If you wish to delete all addresses click the Delete All button Click the OK button Up to 50 destinations can be specified The printer driver settings are applied to sending settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 497 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 498: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 498 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 499: ...onding extensions that can be printed directly are shown below File Type TIFF JPEG PC L PDF Encrypt PDF High Compression PD F P S XP S Extensio n tiff ti f jpeg jpg jpe jfi f pcl pdf ps xps Depending on the file type it may not be possible to print some files in the above table To print XPS files the XPS expansion kit is required USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa ...

Page 500: ...le that you wish to print and tap the Choose Print Settings key on the action panel When printing multiple files tap the keys of the files you wish to print and tap the Print key on the action panel To configure an FTP server In Setting mode select Application Settings Setting for Print from the MFP FTP and configure an FTP server Administrator rights are required Up to 20 FTP servers can be confi...

Page 501: ...ed A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed Tap to move up one folder level When you move down a folder level by tapping a folder key appears Tap this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen Tap the File or Folder Name key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen Each time the key is tapped the order changes between ascending and desce...

Page 502: ...ou wish to print and tap the Choose Print Settings key on the action panel When printing multiple files tap the keys of the files you wish to print and tap the Print key on the action panel The icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be printed Use a FAT32 USB memory device with a capacity of no more than 32 GB Printing from a USB memory device is not possible when System Settings in Se...

Page 503: ...otal of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed Tap to move up one folder level When you move down a folder level by tapping a folder key appears Tap this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen Tap the File or Folder Name key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen Each time the key is tapped the order changes between ascending and descending ...

Page 504: ...ng key Tap the Select File from Network Folder to Print key on the action panel Tap the Open Registered Network Folder key on the action panel and tap the network folder that you wish to access To register a network folder In Setting mode select Application Settings Setting for Print from the MFP SMB to store a network folder Administrator rights are required Up to 20 network folders can be regist...

Page 505: ...s that can be printed The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the network folder To display a folder or a file in a folder tap this key When you tap the Direct Input of Folder Path key a screen appears to allow direct input of the network folder path For details see Entering the network folder path directly When you select the workgroup server and network folder in sequence you can...

Page 506: ...k folder For the procedure for printing see steps 4 to 6 of Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine s settings A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed Tap to move up one folder level To return to the network folder selection screen tap Tap the File or Folder Name key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen Each time th...

Page 507: ...ou to enter a user name and password check with your server administrator and enter the appropriate user name and password Tap the key of the network folder that you wish to access Access the network folder For the procedure for printing see steps 4 to 6 of Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine s settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica...

Page 508: ...IONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYS Up to 100 workgroups 100 servers and 100 network folders are displayed Tap to move up one folder level To return to the workgroup selection screen tap USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 508 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 509: ...PC connected to the same network For the procedure for accessing Setting Mode Web version see SETTING MODE SETTING MODE User s Manual If you print a file that includes print settings i e PCL PS or XPS files the settings will be applied When user authentication is enabled in the settings of the machine the print function may be restricted For more information ask your administrator USER S MANUAL MX...

Page 510: ...tomatically begins To perform FTP print In Setting mode select Application Settings Setting for Print from the PC set FTP Print to Valid and then configure the port number Administrator rights are required If you print a file that includes print settings i e PCL PS or XPS files the settings will be applied When user authentication is enabled in the settings of the machine the print function may be...

Page 511: ...f copies and print format Commands are entered in the format command name value as shown in the example to the right As an example the control commands include the following Function Command name Values Copies COPIES 1 999 Staple 1 STAPLEOPTION NONE ONE TWO SADDLE Punch 2 PUNCH OFF ON OUTPUT COLLATE OFF ON 2 sided Print DUPLEX OFF TOP LEFT RIGHT To perform e mail print In Setting mode select Appli...

Page 512: ...il text must be in a text format If entered in Rich Text format HTML the commands will have no effect If you enter Config in the mail text a list of control commands is returned If nothing is entered in the body text message of the e mail printing will take place according to the settings configured in Setting mode System Settings Printer Condition Settings Default Settings If you print a file tha...

Page 513: ...splayed to indicate that an encrypted PDF file exists Tap the print job key for the encrypted PDF file Tap the Enter Password for Encrypted PDF key on the action panel To print an encrypted PDF file using the printer driver enter the password when opening the file on your PC Printing is not possible if you do not know the password for the encrypted PDF file Encrypted PDF versions that can be direc...

Page 514: ...y When both a master password and a user password which is used to open the file have been set enter the master password USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 514 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 515: ...immediately available you can use paper that is set in a different tray Operation Tap the job status display Tap the key of the job for which Paper Empty appeared Tap the Change Paper key on the action panel Tap the key for the tray containing the paper that you wish to use and tap If you changed to a different paper size printing may not take place correctly for example part of the text or image ...

Page 516: ...te jobs or to perform priority processing see the following items STOPPING DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 516 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 517: ...ustom watermark is selected a transparent watermark image is registered This function is available in a Windows environment This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used To prohibit the registration of custom images In Setting mode select System Settings Copy Settings Copy Settings Prohibition of Custom Image Registration and configure the setting If you have attempted to store mu...

Page 518: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 518 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 519: ...nel Printers In Windows XP Server 2003 click the Start button then click Printers and Faxes In Windows 8 right click on the Start window or swipe up from the lower end of the window then click the App Bar All apps Control Panel Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers In Windows XP if Printers and Faxes does not appear in the Start menu select Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware Printers and ...

Page 520: ...e File menu then click Properties Click the Configuration tab then click the Printing Policy button Set the Billing Code check box to then click the OK button USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 520 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 521: ...ode set Always Use This Billing Code to Start printing Enter the main code and sub code then click the OK button USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 521 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 522: ...ng code is disabled and it is not recorded in the job log If you have started printing without specifying a billing code a use code is recorded in the job log Select Billing Code Enter the main code and sub code USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 522 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 523: ...n Off On Off Yes Yes 2 Sided Pri nt Yes Yes Yes Yes Fit To Paper Size Yes Yes No Binding Edg e Yes Yes No Yes Staple 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Punch 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Paper Paper Size Yes Yes Yes Yes Custom Pa per 7 size 7 size Yes Yes Paper Selec tion Yes Yes Yes Yes Output Yes Yes Yes Yes Convenient printer functions Pamphlet St yle 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http ...

Page 524: ...ctions Different Pa per Yes Yes Yes 6 Yes 6 Transparenc y Inserts Yes Yes No Yes Carbon Cop y Yes Yes No No Tab Paper P rint Yes Yes 7 No No Chapter Ins erts Yes No No No Page interle ave Yes No No No Fold 3 Half Fold Multi Sheet Fold Half Fold Multi Sheet Fold Half Fold Half Fold Multi Sheet Fold Layout printi ng Yes No No No USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com...

Page 525: ...t To Bla ck Vector T o Black Yes Yes No No Billing code Yes Yes No Yes FUNCTIONS TO C OMBINE TEXT AN D IMAGES Watermark Yes Yes Yes Yes Image Stam p Yes Yes No No Overlay Yes Yes No No Resolution Print Mode Normal High quality Ultra fine Normal High quality Ultra fine Normal High quality Ultra fine Normal High quality Ultra fine Graphics Mo Yes No No No USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USE...

Page 526: ... use the punch function 3 If a saddle finisher is installed 4 The horizontal and vertical proportiocn annot be set separately 5 This function can not be used in Mac OS X 10 4 10 5 6 Only covers can be inserted 7 Only the amount of the shift of the text string data created in the application is set 8 Cannot be used in Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 10 7 and 10 8 9 This setting may not operate in some applicati...

Page 527: ... position When the main power indicator is lit up the main power is in the position If the main power indicator is not lit up turn the main power switch to the position and press the POWER button on the operation panel If the fax function will be used and in particular if reception or timer transmission will take place at night always keep the main power switch in the position USER S MANUAL MX M36...

Page 528: ...sion will take place at night do not turn the main power off If you want to set the type of telephone line automatically In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Default Settings Dial Mode Setting then tap the Auto Select key If necessary you can set the type of telephone line manually To set the date and time of the machine In Setting mode select System Settings Def...

Page 529: ...m ADDRESS BOOK STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH STORING ADDRESSES FROM FAX OR IMAGE SEND LOGS STORING GROUPS In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Own Number and Name Set Sender Data Registration USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M...

Page 530: ...is not displayed tap and tap Fax Tap the Fax mode icon Tap on the mode display Tap Image Send In Setting mode by selecting System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Default Settings Address Book Default Selection and setting the Higher priority is given to the display of address book checkbox to the Address Book in fax mode is displayed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http s...

Page 531: ...BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 531 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 532: ... enter the destination number directly or search and retrieve the address book or number ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND SENDING BY CHAIN DIALING USER S MANUA...

Page 533: ...IFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE CHANGING THE EXPOSURE CHANGING THE RESOLUTION SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES JOB BUILD SENDING A THIN ORIGINAL SLOW SCAN MODE SENDING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION ORIGINAL COUNT Set Others Use Others other than the time when using scan settings such as sending two pages as a si...

Page 534: ...x normally memory transmission Repeat the steps for placing and scanning the originals the same number of times as there are originals After scanning all originals tap the Read End key After you have scanned an original by tapping the Preview key tap the Additional Scan key to scan the next original Then tap the Start key to send the original When sending a fax in direct transmission mode Multi pa...

Page 535: ...04 015 htm Start key to start transmission USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 535 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 536: ...its of the number The Pause key appears on the numeric keys when the destination fax number is entered Tap the Pause key to enter a hyphen If you want to specify multiple addresses tap and enter the number of the next address You can also tap Pause key to specify multiple destinations The Pause key appears on the numeric keys when the destination fax number is entered If an incorrect number is ent...

Page 537: ...ed in addition to fax destinations an icon indicating the mode appears together with the name of the destination in each one touch key Fax Scan to E mail Internet Fax Direct SMTP Scan to FTP Scan to Network Folder Scan to Desktop Group key in which multiple addresses are stored For information on the address book see ADDRESS BOOK For the procedure for storing an address in the address book see STO...

Page 538: ...er of addresses appears next to Even if only a single destination is selected the number of addresses appears when the destination is a contact or group in which multiple addresses are stored For more information see ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN If you select an incorrect destination Tap the key again to cancel the selection To select a destination from the transmission log tap the Select among addresses r...

Page 539: ...a global address book To check the entered destinations tap the Confirm Address key on the action panel VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS Tap the one touch key and then tap the Show Details key on the action panel to display the detailed information screen The destination for transmission can be selected by tapping a stored destination USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http...

Page 540: ...the confirmation is completed tap DELETING SPECIFIED DESTINATIONS In Step 2 of CONFIRMING DELETING SPECIFIED DESTINATIONS section tap the Delete key on the action panel To confirm detailed information such as the type or name of the specified destination tap the one touch key of the target destination and then tap the Confirm Destination Information key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USE...

Page 541: ... number is entered Tap the C key to clear the number and enter the correct number The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book If you do not know the search number tap the Print Individual List key on the action panel to print and check the address list When entering search numbers such as 0001 and 0011 0 can be omitted For example to enter 0001 enter 1 and ta...

Page 542: ...ddress book screen tap the Global Address Search key on the action panel Tap Search from and tap the LDAP server to be used If an authentication screen for the LDAP server appears enter your user name and password If only one LDAP server has been stored it is not necessary to take step 2 In this case start from step 3 After the settings are completed tap USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N US...

Page 543: ...etters An asterisk can be used as follows XXX Names beginning with XXX XXX Names that end with XXX XXX Names containing XXX AA XX Names that start with AA and end with XX To add other destination continuously tap the address and tap To check the destination information Tap the one touch key of the target destination and then tap the Confirm Destination Information key Tap to close the address info...

Page 544: ...ered However addresses of the FTP Desktop Network Folder transmission cannot be stored from the machine Operation Tap the Select among addresses recently sent to key on the action panel Tap the key of the fax destination that you wish to redial The last 50 addresses used for transmission are displayed If numeric keys were tapped during the previous transmission the number may not be redialed corre...

Page 545: ... the Register New Address in Address Book the destination can be stored in the address book This is convenient if you have entered a destination directly USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 545 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 546: ...ne connection The time in seconds set in Pause Time Setting of Setting mode defines the length of pause On the screen a hyphen indicates a pause If two seconds are set in Pause Time Setting tapping the Pause key three times enters pauses for 6 seconds Example Using chain dialing to dial an international number To set the length of pause In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fa...

Page 547: ...age in parallel with the scanning process Quick On Line Sending If transmission cannot begin immediately because the line is in use all pages will be scanned into memory and the transmission will be reserved USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION Storing a fax job If transmission cannot begin immediately because the line is in use all pages will be scanned and stored in memory If you...

Page 548: ...CATION ERROR OCCURS The line of the machine will be busy if another fax is being sent received or if the machine is in the busy state Another fax transmission was reserved ahead of your fax One of the following functions is being used for transmission Broadcast transmission F code transmission Timer transmission Dual Page Scan Book Divide 2in1 Card Shot Job Build Original Count The document glass ...

Page 549: ... ahead of any previously reserved transmissions Tap the Direct TX key on the action panel to send a fax USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR FAXING IN DIRECT TX MODE USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TX MODE Quick On Line Sending is not available when a fax is being sent from the document glass When the document glass is used multiple original pages cannot be scanned at a time In...

Page 550: ...atically changes back to memory transmission mode In direct transmission mode the Preview key cannot be used for transmission USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 550 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 551: ...ng rotated Rotation sending is not available for originals with 8 1 2 x 11 R or 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A4R B5 or A5 size To cancel the rotation sending setting In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Send Settings Rotation Sending Setting If this setting is disabled the original will be transmitted in the orientation in which it is placed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M...

Page 552: ...ize Rati o 11 x 17 A3 B4 B4 1 0 8 4 11 x 17 A3 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 A 4 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 R A4R 1 0 7 1 B4 8 1 2 x 11 A4 A4R 1 0 8 4 To cancel the Auto Reduction Sending setting In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Send Settings Auto Reduction Sending Setting If this setting is disabled the image will be sent at full size and part of the image may be cut off...

Page 553: ...eight x 5 1 2 wid th 131 mm height x 140 mm wi dth 11 5 8 height x 39 3 8 wi dth 297 mm height x 1000 mm wi dth Using the document glass 11 5 8 height x 17 width 297 mm height x 432 mm widt h A long original can be transmitted USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 553 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 554: ...8 1 2 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A4 A3 Inch 2 11 x17 8 1 2 x13 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x11 8 1 2 x11 R 5 1 2 x8 1 2 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 13 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A4 A3 Inch 3 11 x17 8 1 2 x13 2 5 216 mm x 34 0 mm 8 1 2 x11 8 1 2 x11 R 5 1 2 x8 1 2 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 13 2 5 216 mm x 340 mm 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A4 A3 AB 1 A3 A4 A4R...

Page 555: ... A4 A4R A5 B4 8K 16K 16KR AB 4 A3 A4 A4R A5 B5 B5R 216 mm x 340 mm 8 1 2 x 13 2 5 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 17 216 mm x 340 mm 8 1 2 x 13 2 5 A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R AB 5 A3 A4 A4R A5 B5 B5R 216 mm x 343 mm 8 1 2 x 13 1 2 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 17 216 mm x 343 mm 8 1 2 x 13 1 2 A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 555 o...

Page 556: ...on Cancel it from the job status screen STOPPING DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED To set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when the connection cannot be established because the line is busy or for other reasons In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Send Settings Recall in Case of Line Busy The factory default setting is two atte...

Page 557: ...ain To cancel the transmission Cancel it from the job status screen STOPPING DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED To set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when a transmission fails due to an error In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Send Settings Recall in Case of Communication Error The factory default setting is one attempt at 3...

Page 558: ...ys Select among addresses After tapping the Speaker key while Fax Dest Confirmation Mode is enabled the destination cannot be specified using the numeric keys one touch key Call Search Number key or Select among addresses recently sent to key However it is possible to send through a telephone To display the destination confirmation message prior to fax transmission In Setting mode select System Se...

Page 559: ...ly has been resent A confirmation screen is displayed based on the method used to specify the destination during the previous transmission You can use the numeric keys to enter fax numbers serially In that case tap to enter the destination fax number to be added If the Sub Address key was tapped to enter a sub address and passcode the fax number must be re entered during confirmation After re ente...

Page 560: ...on PREVIEW SCREEN The settings and functions that can be changed while and after an image is scanned for preview are as follows Exposure Send Size 2 Sided Booklet Tablet Resolution Erase Job Build 2in1 Timer Own Name Select and Transaction Report Depending on the size of the transmission data part of the preview image may not appear in the preview screen in the touch panel The preview function is ...

Page 561: ...ther original that cannot be placed in the automatic document feeder open the automatic document feeder and place the original on the document glass If there is a fax job in progress when the transmission operation is performed the fax is transmitted when the job in progress is finished If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned a message will appear and scanning will stop Wh...

Page 562: ...ore sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED When all originals have been scanned Job stored will be displayed together with a job control number This number is recorded in the transaction report and image sending activity report and can be used to check fax jobs PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTS To cancel scanning the original Tap the Cancel Scan key USER ...

Page 563: ...ok Divide Poling 2 Sided Scan Search Global Address Book Resending will not take place when a direct transmission is not successful due to a communication error or other reason If a fax transmission is already in progress when the direct transmission operation is performed the direct transmission will wait until the previous transmission is finished When the previous transmission is completed the ...

Page 564: ...BER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND SENDING BY CHAIN DIALING Tap the Start key to begin transmission Only one destination can be specified A one touch key in which multiple destinations are stored cannot be used The destination cannot be retrieved from a global address book USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Man...

Page 565: ...ng received when the transmission operation is performed the transmission will be reserved and transmission will take place after fax reception is completed If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned a message will appear and transmission will be canceled Do not place any objects under the original size detector Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath ...

Page 566: ...or one minute scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved To cancel scanning Tap the STOP key before the Read End key is tapped When scanning is completed Job stored will be displayed together with a job control number This number can be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTS If no action is ...

Page 567: ...esolution scan size and send size for each original page scanned However when 2in1 or Card Shot is selected in Others only the exposure can be changed when scanning an even numbered original page USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 567 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 568: ... communication error or other reason If a fax transmission is already in progress when the direct transmission operation is performed the direct transmission will wait until the previous transmission is finished When the previous transmission is completed the direct transmission will begin While the direct transmission is waiting the job status display can be tapped to display the job status scree...

Page 569: ... Start key to begin transmission When the line has been connected to the destination scanning of the original starts When faxing a multi page original scan each page in order starting from the first page Only one destination can be specified A one touch key in which multiple destinations are stored cannot be used The destination cannot be retrieved from a global address book If a fax transmission ...

Page 570: ...While the direct transmission is waiting you can only check the job status JOB STATUS SCREEN To cancel scanning the original Tap the Cancel Scan key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 570 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 571: ...person answers you will be able to hear his or her voice but you will not be able to speak When the speaker is used transmission takes place without scanning the original into memory A destination that includes an F code sub address and passcode cannot be used A one touch key that has multiple destinations or has a non fax destination cannot be used In speaker mode the Preview key cannot be used f...

Page 572: ...MISSION LOG TO RESEND SENDING BY CHAIN DIALING When the connection is made tap the Start key to begin transmission Volume key or use key to adjust the volume of the speaker A one touch key in which multiple destinations are stored cannot be used To cancel transmission To stop transmission tap the Stop key To stop communication tap the Speaker key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S htt...

Page 573: ...500 destinations can be stored in a contact For broadcast transmission the contact or group key can be simply tapped to retrieve multiple fax numbers You can also send faxes with the one touch key by setting the Set to the address as usually used checkbox to when addresses are registered If you wish to temporarily remove a destination from the stored addresses open the detail confirmation screen a...

Page 574: ...night A broadcast transmission can also be used in combination with other convenient functions The broadcast transmission can include Scan to E mail and Internet fax destinations If the Send Same Image as Fax Address checkbox is set to the same image as that sent by the fax is sent even to the destination which supports the color transmission such as Scan to E mail function Even if a color origina...

Page 575: ...ion using the numeric keys tap before entering the next destination can be omitted before or after a destination entered using a one touch key However if Be sure to press Next Address Key before selecting the next address is enabled in setting mode tap before selecting the next destination To cancel a specified destination Tap the one touch key of the destination that you wish to cancel and tap th...

Page 576: ...y A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 576 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 577: ...ey of the completed broadcast transmission tap the Check Details of Selected Job key on the action panel Broadcast xxxx will appear as the destination of the broadcast job key The job control number that appeared on the touch panel when scanning ended appears in xxxx If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes the same broadcast transmission key will appear in each of th...

Page 578: ... unsuccessful destinations entered Perform the document filing resend procedure There is no need to re scan the original If the job was stored in a confidential folder or was stored as confidential file a password entry screen will appear after you tap the Retry key Enter the password Not using document filing You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered Place the ...

Page 579: ... a fax By using the Log Viewer application faxes can be sent using the transmission log displayed in the Log Viewer For the procedures for using this function see the PC Fax driver Help To use the PC Fax function the PC Fax driver must be installed For more information see Software Setup Guide This function can only be used on a Windows computer Only transmission is available for this function Fax...

Page 580: ...he binding edge if the original and select the key to be tapped 2 sided scanning automatically turns off after transmission has ended 2 sided scanning is not possible when direct transmission or speaker transmission is performed 2 sided scanning is not possible when a mixed size original is scanned You cannot use 2 sided scanning when the original size is set to Long Size USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX...

Page 581: ...itted After the settings are completed tap To cancel 2 sided scanning Tap the 2 sided original type Tablet key or the 2 sided original type Book key that has been forcibly displayed and cancel the display USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 581 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 582: ...2 x 11 A4 and the send size is 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 B5 the image will be reduced before transmission Only standard original sizes can be automatically detected Standard sizes When the original size is an inch size or a non standard size or if the size is not detected correctly manually specify the original scan size SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING N...

Page 583: ...an Size key Tap the appropriate original size key After the settings are completed tap When Long Size is selected the 2 sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed The image is sent in Mono2 only When Postcard Photo Size or a standard size direct entry is selected send size cannot be changed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manu...

Page 584: ...er to scan a long original The maximum width that can be scanned is 39 3 8 1 000 mm the maximum height is 11 5 8 297 mm TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 584 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 585: ...peration Tap the Original key After tapping the Scan Size key Tap the Direct Entry key and enter the scan size Tap the areas displaying sizes in width and height respectively and enter the sizes using the numeric keys It is convenient to use to finely adjust the entered size When the scan size is specified by numeric values the send size cannot be specified USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N...

Page 586: ...se screen check that the specified size is displayed on the Original key To cancel the specified size settings Tap the Auto key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 586 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 587: ...the desired send size key After the settings are completed tap The send size cannot be specified when Long Size is selected for the scan size or when the scan size is specified by numerical values Depending on the paper size specified for the Scan Size it may not be possible to select some sizes for the Send Size Size keys that cannot be specified for the Send Size cannot be tapped USER S MANUAL M...

Page 588: ...efault setting of image orientation select System Settings in Setting mode then Image Send Settings Operation Settings Default Settings Image Orientation The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the Scan Size and the Send Size USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 588 of 1441 3 17 2016 7...

Page 589: ...hen the original consists of light text Operation After tapping the Exposure key tap the Manual key Adjust the exposure with the slider or After the adjustment tap When using the automatic document feeder the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun However when Job Build or Preview Setting in Others is used the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is inserted...

Page 590: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 590 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 591: ... or diagrams This setting gives the best image quality However transmission will take longer tha n with the other settings Half Tone Select this setting when your original is a photograph or has gradations of color s uch as a color original This setting will produce a clearer image than Fine Super Fine or Ultra Fine u sed alone Halftone cannot be selected when Standard is used Operation When using...

Page 592: ...al and you wish to produce a clearer image than Fine Super Fine or Ultra Fine used alone set the Half Tone checkbox to Halftone cannot be selected when Standard is used After the settings are completed tap USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 592 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 593: ...epending on the orientation vertical or horizontal in which the sender placed the original If a print job such as the copy or printer function has already been executed when printing the received data the first reserved job is printed before the received data Received faxes will not be printed when the machine cannot print due to an error condition such as out of paper out of toner or a paper misf...

Page 594: ...the system area at the top of the screen If a password entry screen appears A password is registered to print the received fax data When the correct password is entered the received fax is printed PRINTING A PASSWORD PROTECTED FAX Hold setting for received data print USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 594 of 1441 3 17 2016...

Page 595: ... ON THE EXTENSION TELEPHONE REMOTE RECEPTION To switch between auto reception and manual reception modes In Setting mode select System Settings Receive Forward Settings Fax Settings Receive Settings Adjust the volume by using the slider that is displayed when you tap the Speaker Volume key or using If the received fax data remains unprinted it will cause the fax memory to fill up which may prevent...

Page 596: ...Tap the Manual Reception key to receive a fax USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 596 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 597: ...rint the received data as soon as possible without leaving it in the fax memory You can view the remaining fax memory capacity on the fax mode base screen A warning message appears when free fax memory is low To perform this operation the user must have Access to Fax Data permission To enable the hold setting for received data print In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Operat...

Page 598: ...her machine data stored in memory is also transferred At that time the same password entry screen will appear as for printing Forwarding will not take place unless the password is entered To display the received data list screen after entering the password In Setting mode select System Settings Operation Settings Preview Setting Received Data Image Check Setting USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX ...

Page 599: ...ta is automatically deleted from memory If the power is turned off at the specified time printing will start at the timing when the power is turned on This function is enabled if System Settings Operation Settings Preview Setting are selected in Setting mode administrator and if Received Data Image Check Setting is enabled USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com por...

Page 600: ...ion Settings Default Settings Time Specified Output of Received Data To disable the hold setting for received data print In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Default Settings Hold Setting for Received Data Print USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 600 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 601: ...iew the remaining fax memory capacity on the fax mode base screen Operation When data is received is shown at the top of the screen To perform this operation the user must have Access to Fax Data permission Depending on the size of the received data part of the check image on the touch panel may not appear The received data list can be also shown in the job status screen that appears when you tap ...

Page 602: ...he action panel Tap to show a list of received data The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode To delete a received image tap the Delete key on the action panel To transfer the selected received image tap the Forward to Other Destination key FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY To save the selected received image tap the File key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M...

Page 603: ...inistrator select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Receive Settings Allow Reject Number Setting Tap the image you wish to print and tap the Print key on the action panel A preview image is an image for the touch panel It will differ from the actual print result Tap the Erase Specified Range key to delete unwanted area of the image Specify the image area you wish to delete in the Er...

Page 604: ...lete the entire received data file tap Delete on the Action Panel USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 604 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 605: ...d tap the Fax Data Receive Forward key If some pages of a fax that is being forwarded were successfully printed only those pages that were not printed will be forwarded A forwarded fax becomes a fax transmission job If transmission does not take place because the transmission was canceled or an error occurred the fax will be held in memory until it can be printed All faxes received are forwarded N...

Page 606: ...e Hold Setting for Received Data Print has been enabled Enter the password using the numeric keys to begin forwarding PRINTING A PASSWORD PROTECTED FAX HOLD SETTING FOR RECEIVED DATA PRINT USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 606 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 607: ...ing settings for all received data For the procedure for accessing the setting mode Web version see the Quick Start Guide The following explanation assumes that the setting mode Web version has been accessed with administrator rights Whether or not to forward data for each forwarding table can be quickly set In Setting mode select Application Settings Forward Received Data and tap Valid Invalid on...

Page 608: ...ing forwarding tables in this screen and from specifying which table is used To do so set the checkboxes for the following items to Disable Registration of Forward Table Disable Change Delete of Forward Table Disable Change of Forward Approval Specify in Print Style Setting whether or not to have the machine to print the faxes to forward when inbound routing is enabled After the settings are compl...

Page 609: ...e Store button Click Inbound Routing Settings in the Setting mode menu and click the Add button Enter a Table Name Select the forwarding conditions error box of forwarding received data key on the action panel To perform this operation the user must have Access to Fax Data permission If you wish to have only faxes from specified addresses forwarded store the desired sender addresses Send addresses...

Page 610: ... the desired day of the week To specify a time select the Set Forwarding Time checkbox and specify the time Select the file format The format can be set separately for each forwarding address for each of forwarding addresses 1 2 and 3 in the table When selecting senders from the Sender Number Address Setting list you can use the Shift key or the Ctrl key on your keyboard to select multiple senders...

Page 611: ...cify a fax number also specify the sending line and international correspondence mode When enter the recipients directly up to 100 recipients can be registered for e mail address network folder FTP Desktop Internet fax and fax Click Store Click Inbound Routing Settings in Setting mode From the forwarding table select Forward to All Forward Destinations or Forward based on the Conditions of Forward...

Page 612: ... forwarding permission settings Click Store To use the inbound routing function enable the forwarding tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables To delete a forwarding table click the checkbox next to the table name so that it is selected and click Delete USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 612 of 1441 3 17 20...

Page 613: ...e button Settings for saving received faxes to the hard disk In Setting mode click Application Settings Inbound Routing HDD Storage Up to 500 files can be stored in one folder as received data The faxreceive folder contains files of Inbound Routing HDD Storage Settings Received data is saved in the folder specified in Specify folder in Inbound Routing HDD Storage Settings in Application Settings I...

Page 614: ... reception faxes cannot be saved Depending on the setting received faxes that cannot be saved because of the file number limit or other reason are either printed or saved in the inbound routing error box USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 614 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 615: ...ttings Preview Setting Received Data Image Check Setting is enabled in Setting mode The factory default setting is disabled In the System Information tap the Event Information tab and tap the Check Fax Reception Image key You can also display the received data list by tapping the job status display and tapping the Check Received Data key on the action panel of Job Status screen Tap the key of the ...

Page 616: ...tion message screen tap the Store key Specify a sender fax number as a number for Allow Reject Number Setting by selecting in Setting mode administrator select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Receive Settings Allow Reject Number Setting Select the destination from the Address Book screen and tap the Start key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com ...

Page 617: ...age Check Setting is enabled in Setting mode The factory default setting is disabled In the System Information tap the Event Information tab and tap the Check Fax Reception Image key You can also display the received data list by tapping the job status display and tapping the Check Received Data key on the action panel of Job Status screen USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica...

Page 618: ...view screen To store the sender fax number as a number for Allow Reject Number Setting tap the Store to Unwanted Fax key and in the confirmation message screen tap the Store key Specify a sender fax number as a number for Allow Reject Number Setting by selecting in Setting mode administrator select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Receive Settings Allow Reject Number Setting Set th...

Page 619: ...ed program Tap the Start key Scan and send the original Considerable time is required to send the docum ents each month because the above settings m ust be selected In addition mistakes are occasionally made whe When a program is stored settings are selecte d with ease by simply tapping the key of the pr ogram In addition transmission takes place according 1 The same documents are faxed to each br...

Page 620: ...reens The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission The same settings can be used repeatedly for transmission The following contents cannot be stored in programs Tapping the Speaker key Custom Size Card Shot page move and unspecified erase during preview Metadata Entry Send Settings and Own Name Select Up to 48 programs can be stored Up to 500 de...

Page 621: ...ime After you have scanned the last original tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended Some settings cannot be added depending on the contents of the called program Tap the Preview key to preview the output image before sending it After you have scanned an original by tapping the Preview key tap the Additional Scan key to scan the next original Ta...

Page 622: ...ment glass Operation Transmission is not possible at a size smaller than the original size The 2in1 is only available for originals with 8 1 2 x 11 A4 or 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 B5 or A5 size This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial When the scan size of the original is specified by numeric values this function cannot be used This function cannot be used t...

Page 623: ...DDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND SENDING BY CHAIN DIALING Tap the Others key and tap the Multi Shot key A checkmark appears on the icon After the settings are completed tap the Back key Tap the Original key Tap the Image Orientation key with the same orientation as the placed original If this setting is not correct a suitable image may not be transmitted After the settings are comple...

Page 624: ...ing and transmission have ended Tap the Preview key to preview the output image before sending it After you have scanned an original by tapping the Preview key tap the Additional Scan key to scan the next original Tap the Start key to start sending an image For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED If you tap the Function Rev key on the scan confirmation screen you can change t...

Page 625: ...ed on the document glass If the original size is larger than the send size it will result in a sending failure Check the original size once more and specify it again The ratio cannot be specified and Rotation Sending Setting cannot be selected This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica shar...

Page 626: ...IALING Tap the Others key and tap the Card Shot key Tap the On key and specify the original size as required After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively and enter the sizes using the numeric keys To quickly set the size first specify a value close to the desired ratio value by the numeric keys then adjust it by tapping...

Page 627: ... you tap the scan size key For the procedure for setting the send size see SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE To cancel the Card Shot settings Tap the Off key Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen Before scanning the back of...

Page 628: ...the front of the card you can tap the Change Setting key to change the exposure resolution scan size and send size USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 628 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 629: ...eparated into sets scan the set that has the first page first The settings that you select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets Operation This function is not available for Quick On Line Sending manual transmission Direct TX or transmission using the speaker Up to 999 pages can be scanned Note that when the memory is being used for other jobs fewer pages can be scanned If the memor...

Page 630: ...NUMERIC KEYS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND SENDING BY CHAIN DIALING Tap the Job Build key A checkmark appears on the icon Tap the Start key to scan the first set To cancel the Job Build setting Tap the Job Bui...

Page 631: ...cancel scanning the original Tap the Cancel Scan key If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved The Change Setting key can be tapped to change the exposure resolution scan size and send size for each original page scanned However when Job Build is used in combination with Multi Shot in Others only the expo...

Page 632: ...x 17 and 8 1 2 x 13 11 x 17 and 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A3 and B4 A3 and B5 B4 and A4 A4 and B5 A4R and B5 B4 and A4R B4 and A5 B5 and A5 Operation Once mixed size originals has been selected an original scan size cannot be specified Once the original scan size has been selected Mixed Size Original cannot be specified Rotate cannot be used when Mixed Size Original is enabled This function is not available i...

Page 633: ...ON NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND SENDING BY CHAIN DIALING Tap the Mixed Size Original key A checkmark appears on the icon Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original To cancel the Mixed Size Original setting Tap the Mixed Size Original key to clear the checkmark Tap the Preview key to preview the output image before sending it After you have scanned a...

Page 634: ...information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 634 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 635: ... size Transmitted image 11 x 17 A3 x 1 page 8 1 2 x 11 A4 x 2 page Operation Place the original on the document glass DOCUMENT GLASS When using dual page scan the original must be placed on the document glass This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to Auto Note that Center Erase and Edge Center Erase cannot be used USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http sii...

Page 636: ...G A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND SENDING BY CHAIN DIALING Tap the Others key and tap the Dual Page Scan key A checkmark appears on the icon After the settings are completed tap the Back key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M3...

Page 637: ...mation see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen Tap the Preview key to preview the output image before sending it After you have scanned an original by tapping the Preview key tap the Additional Scan key to scan the next original Tap the Start key to start sending an image For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE T...

Page 638: ...t feeder tray of the automatic document feeder AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Enter the destination fax number ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to Auto The document glass is not available for this function USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N M...

Page 639: ...he original A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended To cancel the Book Divide setting Tap the Off key Tap the Preview key to preview the output image before sending it After you have scanned an original by tapping the Preview key tap the Additional Scan key to scan the next original Tap the Start key to start sending an image For more information see CHECKING THE IM...

Page 640: ...the parts of the image where shadows tend to form but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows Scanning a thick book Not using the erase function Using the erase function Shadows appear in the image No shadows appear Erase modes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 640 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 641: ...atio This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows For example if you set an erase width of 1 2 10 mm and reduce the image to 70 before transmission the erase width will be reduced to 7 mm To change the default erase width setting Select System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Default Settings Erase Widt...

Page 642: ...asing edges of one to three sides of Up Down Left and Right on the front side to scan a 2 sided original If the Reverse erase position of back face checkbox is set to the edge in the position opposite to the erased edge on the front side will be erased If the Reverse erase position of back face checkbox is set to the edge in the same position as on the front side will be erased Tap the numeric val...

Page 643: ...he Read End key To quickly set the area first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys then adjust it with To cancel the erase settings Tap the Clear key Tap the Preview key to preview the output image before sending it After you have scanned an original by tapping the Preview key tap the Additional Scan key to scan the next original Tap the Start key to start sending an imag...

Page 644: ...e document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Adjust the original guides slowly Enter the destination fax number When slow scan mode is selected 2 sided scanning is not possible If the originals are inserted with too much force they may crumple and misfeed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365...

Page 645: ...cate that scanning and transmission have ended To cancel the Slow Scan Mode setting Tap the Slow Scan Mode key to clear the checkmark Tap the Preview key to preview the output image before sending it After you have scanned an original by tapping the Preview key tap the Additional Scan key to scan the next original Tap the Start key to start sending an image For more information see CHECKING THE IM...

Page 646: ...OOK THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND SENDING BY CHAIN DIALING Tap the Original Count key A checkmark appears on the icon The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets not the number of scanned original pages For example when a 2 sided ori...

Page 647: ... the Original Count setting Tap the Original Count key to clear the checkmark Tap the Preview key to preview the output image before sending a fax After you have scanned an original by tapping the Preview key tap the Additional Scan key to scan the next original After checking the preview image tap the Start key For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for thi...

Page 648: ...the OK key in the message screen to clear all scanned data Scan settings and destination settings will not be cleared Insert the original sheets in the document feeder tray again and tap the Start key to re scan USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 648 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 649: ...NATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK To use the verification stamp function the optional stamp unit must be installed When 2 sided originals are used the front of each original is stamped twice If an error occurs during scanning an original that was not scanned may be stamped When the O mark that is stamped on originals starts to become faint replace the stamp cartridge For the procedure for replaci...

Page 650: ...and transmission have ended To cancel the Verification Stamp setting Tap the Verification Stamp key to clear the checkmark Tap the Preview key to preview the output image before sending it After you have scanned an original by tapping the Preview key tap the Additional Scan key to scan the next original Tap the Start key to start sending an image For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE T...

Page 651: ...g When you are using fax information services you can manually poll and receive information by following the announcement of another machine Make sure there is no original in the machine when using the polling reception function The function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function The receiving machine bears the expense phone charges of the p...

Page 652: ...sent Only one timer polling reception can be set To cancel the Polling setting Tap the Polling key to clear the checkmark Multiple fax numbers can be entered maximum of 500 Polling will take place in the order that the multiple fax numbers were entered Polling multiple machines is called Multi Polling To enter multiple fax numbers tap after entering a fax number and enter the next fax number In th...

Page 653: ...ax reception Your machine will call the other machine and initiate reception of the fax used USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 653 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 654: ...ON RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND SENDING BY CHAIN DIALING Make sure there is no original in the machine when using the polling reception function This function cannot be used to poll multiple machines serial polling The function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function The receivi...

Page 655: ...ax number is stored cannot be used After tapping the Speaker key you can tap the Speaker Volume key to adjust the volume of the speaker To cancel the Polling setting Tap the Polling key to clear the checkmark USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 655 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 656: ...ouch key name 4 Page numbers Page number total pages If destination name is set to be attached and the destination is not specified using a one touch key this information is not added to the fax and not printed To set the date and time In Setting mode select System Settings Default Settings Clock Adjust To store a sender name and sender fax number In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send ...

Page 657: ...bers appear in the format page number total pages Only the page number is printed when Manual Transmission or Quick On Line Sending is used To select a sender fax number or destination In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Send Settings Sender Destination Name Change USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manual...

Page 658: ...ION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND SENDING BY CHAIN DIALING The function is released when the transmission with the changed sender information ends To store the sender information to be used for Own Name Select function In Setting mode...

Page 659: ...e one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended and the machine stands by for transmission To cancel the sender information settings Tap the Clear key Tap the Preview key to preview the output image before sending it After you have scanne...

Page 660: ...For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 660 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 661: ... main power switch Transmission will not take place if the status is at the specified time When performing a timer transmission you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission It is not possible to leave the document in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and have it scanned at the reserved time of transmission Up to 100 timer transmissions can be stored at on...

Page 662: ...tions by polling specify Timer for serial polling Settings selected for a timer transmission exposure resolution other functions etc are automatically cleared after the transmission is finished However when the document filing function is used the scanned original and settings are stored in the built in hard drive If a job scheduled for timer transmission is given priority on the job status screen...

Page 663: ...sing the numeric keys It is convenient to use to finely adjust the time The setting will show the current time If the time is not correct press the CA key to cancel the operation Correct the time in setting mode and then perform the timer transmission procedure BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX To cancel the Timer Transmission settings Tap the Off key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER ...

Page 664: ...ll sound to indicate that scanning has ended and the machine stands by for transmission Tap the Preview key to preview the output image before sending it After you have scanned an original by tapping the Preview key tap the Additional Scan key to scan the next original After checking the preview image tap the Start key For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED The original is s...

Page 665: ...ation Place the original Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in Setting mode however you can temporarily select different conditions for a transmission For a broadcast transmission changes to the transaction report print conditions ap...

Page 666: ...the Transaction Report key Tap the key of the print settings After the settings are completed tap To cancel the transaction report settings Tap the Do not Print key Even if the Print Original Image checkbox is selected the original cannot be printed when speaker dialing manual transmission direct transmission polling reception or F code transmission is used The print conditions for a transaction r...

Page 667: ...is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails Print at Error A transaction report is printed when transmission fails Do not Print Do not print a transaction report Set the Print Original Image checkbox to to include part of the transmitted original in the transaction report Tap the Preview key to preview the output image before sending it After you have scanned an original by tap...

Page 668: ...o polling the document that will be faxed to the other machine must be scanned into a polling memory box SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORY This function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 668 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 669: ... is called Polling Security Setting To use this function first store polling passcode numbers the sender fax numbers programmed in the other machines in settings mode of the machine and then enable the polling security setting The polling security setting can be enabled for up to 10 other machines To set the polling security In Setting mode administrator select System Settings Image Send Settings ...

Page 670: ...ons Tap the Others key and tap the Memory Box key If another document remains in the memory box Public Box the newly scanned document is added to the previous document In this case the number of polling times will be the number set for the newly scanned document To return to the screen of step 4 tap the Memory Box List key A program timer setting transaction report polling and document filing cann...

Page 671: ...nd Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original When the original is scanned a preview image appears in the touch panel If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray all pages are scanned If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat the procedure until all pages have...

Page 672: ...g Memory tab Tap the Public Box key from the folder list Tap the Image Check key to check the document To print the document tap the Print key To perform this operation the user must have Access to Fax Data permission If a document is stored in the public box is displayed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 672 of 1441 3 17...

Page 673: ...eted and you return to the screen of step 2 You can tap the Image Check key to check the image in the touch panel before deleting it To perform this operation the user must have Access to Fax Data permission If a document is stored in the public box is displayed If you tap the Check Image key on the action panel you can check the image on the touch panel before it is erased USER S MANUAL MX M365N ...

Page 674: ...To cancel deleting the document Tap the No key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 674 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 675: ...communication function based on the G3 standard of the ITU T How F codes work A fax that is transmitted with an F code is received in the memory box of F code communication in the receiving machine specified by the F code sub address and passcode If the F code sent by the transmitting machine does not match the F code in The ITU T is a United Nations organization that establishes communications st...

Page 676: ... refer to the terms used by the ITU T in the table below The machin e ITU T F code polling memory b ox F code confidential b ox F code relay broadcasting functi on Sub Address SEP SUB SUB Passcode PWD SID SID An F code consists of a sub address and passcode and cannot be longer than 20 digits USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M36...

Page 677: ...g F code communication functions F code memory boxes must be created in your machine F code confidential reception F code polling memory F code relay broadcast transmission To use the following F code communication functions F code memory boxes must be created in the other machine F CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION F code polling reception F code relay request transmission To create F code memory bo...

Page 678: ...code polling reception F code relay request transmission To use the following F code communication functions the other machine must dial your machine F code confidential reception F code polling memory F code relay broadcast transmission If the destination machine does not have a passcode configured in the F code do not enter a passcode when dialing that machine Communication using the F code sub ...

Page 679: ...he receiving machine is shared by multiple departments To print an F code confidential fax the print passcode must be entered CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY F CODE CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION The F code sub address and passcode of the memory box to be used should be verified by the sender and the recipient before the fax is sent To create F code memory boxes In Setting mode select System Settings F Code Me...

Page 680: ...n can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission It is convenient to store this function in a program The F code confidential transmission cannot be registered as a favorite item Enter the destination line number using the numeric keys 1 Tap the Sub Address key Symbol is entered 2 Enter the sub address using the numeric keys 3 Tap the Passcode key Symbol is entered ...

Page 681: ...cate that transmission has ended If the sub address and passcode are already registered you can select a one touch key as well If the passcode is omitted for the memory box of destination machine you can skip Steps 4 and 5 Tap the Preview key to preview the output image before sending it After you have scanned an original by tapping the Preview key tap the Additional Scan key to scan the next orig...

Page 682: ... box after being printed To perform this operation the user must have Access to Fax Data permission To print transaction report automatically when an F code confidential fax is received In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Default Settings Transaction Report Print Select Setting Confidential Reception If you forget the print passcode There is no way to use the ma...

Page 683: ...changes to Tap the key of the received data you wish to check and tap the Check Image key on the action panel Displays the received data image To print the document tap the Print key Take care to enter the correct print passcode If you make a mistake a message will appear and you will return to the entry screen You can tap the Cancel key to return to step 4 USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N...

Page 684: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 684 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 685: ...take place Verify the F code sub address and passcode of the memory box in the other machine before you perform F code polling reception The receiving machine bears the telephone charges of the transmission If necessary use the F code polling reception in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission Only one polling reception with a timer setting can be stored at a time SPECIFYI...

Page 686: ...Polling setting Tap the Polling key to clear the checkmark Enter the destination line number using the numeric keys 1 Tap the Sub Address key Symbol is entered 2 Enter the sub address using the numeric keys 3 Tap the Passcode key Symbol is entered 4 Enter the passcode using the numeric keys 5 If the sub address and passcode are already registered you can select a one touch key as well If the passc...

Page 687: ...y Your machine will call the other machine and initiate reception of the fax USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 687 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 688: ...ginal to be sent to the other machine using F code polling communication must be previously scanned into an F code memory box polling memory in your machine If other documents have already been stored in the memory box the document is added to the previously stored documents By factory default the document sent to the other machine will be deleted automatically To perform this operation the user m...

Page 689: ...he settings are completed tap and key Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray all pages are scanned When you place the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time After you have scanned the last original tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended In Setting m...

Page 690: ... key to scan the next original Tap the Start key to start sending an image For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 690 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 691: ...r of the F code memory polling box Tap the Check Registered Data key on the action panel To print the document tap the Print key A document in a memory box cannot be printed while the document is being transmitted To perform this operation the user must have Access to Fax Data permission USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M ...

Page 692: ... Registered Data key to check the image in the touch panel before deleting it Tap the Yes key The document is deleted and you return to Step 2 A document in a memory box cannot be deleted while the document is being transmitted To perform this operation the user must have Access to Fax Data permission If you tap the Check Image key on the action panel you can check the image before it is erased To...

Page 693: ...Tap the No key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 693 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 694: ...lay request transmission can be used in combination with the timer transmission function to further reduce cost SPECIFYING THE TIME FOR COMMUNICATION F code sub address and passcode and the destination in the F code relay broadcast memory box of the recipient machine should be verified by the recipient in advance Before using this function program the destination machines in the F code relay broad...

Page 695: ...r machine the machine that requests a relay broadcast transmission only bears the cost of sending the fax to the relay machine The relay machine bears the cost of sending the fax to each of the destination machines If necessary this function can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission It is convenient to store this function in a program When faxes forwarded using...

Page 696: ...beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended When the relay machine receives the fax it will automatically transfer the fax to the destination machines programmed in the memory box If the sub address and passcode are stored in the one touch key it is not necessary to take steps 3 to 5 Go to step 6 If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the destination machine ...

Page 697: ...de relay broadcast memory box in your machine Your machine then relays the fax to each of the destination machines programmed in the memory box Transmission to the destination machine takes place automatically USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 697 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 698: ...t necessary for the destination machines to support F code communication The machine that requests a relay broadcast transmission only bears the cost of sending the fax to your machine the relay machine Your machine bears the cost of sending the fax to each of the destination machines When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination the date and time of reception ...

Page 699: ...nsion telephone configure the External Telephone Setting in setting mode Enable the Tel Fax Auto Change function This is useful as the telephone or fax operation is selected automatically according to the calling You cannot send a fax from your telephone You can connect a telephone with a modular cable plug to your machine Also use the two wire cable for telephone connection If another type of cab...

Page 700: ... the machine to start fax reception Press from the extension telephone To receive a fax after answering a call on the extension telephone In Setting mode select System Settings Fax Data Receive Forward Fax Settings Receive Settings to enable Manual Reception To change the number to receive faxes In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Default Settings Remote Recepti...

Page 701: ...Replace the receiver The machine beeps when reception ends USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 701 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 702: ... A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS Fax jobs include reception timer transmission and data forwarding as well as usual transmission For information on jobs in fax mode see COMPLETED FAX TRANSMISSION RECEPTION JOBS USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 ...

Page 703: ...time and moves to the completed job list If another job is being printed at the specified time the job being printed is prioritized over the timer job Retry jobs A retry job appears at the end of the job queue list Transmission of the retry job starts according to the Recall in Case of Line Busy setting in Setting mode When the transmission is completed the retry job moves to the completed job lis...

Page 704: ...job list After the fax is printed the status changes to Received Then a job is added for which the status field displays Waiting in the job queue list When forwarding the received fax is completed the field changes to Forward OK USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 704 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 705: ...y Report are erased when the report is printed and thus it cannot be reprinted When the Image Sending Activity Report is erased the log is reset The Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reach 200 again the report is printed To configure the image sending activity report In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Default Settings Activity R...

Page 706: ...ansmission was not possible because the other party was already using the line CANCEL The transmission was canceled while in progress MEMORY OVER The memory became full during quick on line transmission MEM FULL The memory became full during reception LENGTH OVER The transmitted fax was over 59 1 5 m long and therefore could not be rec eived ORIGINAL ERROR Direct transmission or manual transmissio...

Page 707: ...g memory box NO F FUNC F code communication was attempted however the other machine does not support F code communication NO F CODE F code communication was refused by the other machine because of an inco rrect sub address or other reason M BOX xxxxxx Data was received and stored in a confidential or relay broadcast memory box or data was sent from a memory polling box The name of the memory box a...

Page 708: ...usly stored e mail address to inform the recipient of the location of the file Scan to Desktop The scanned file is sent to a specified folder on your computer To use Scan to Desktop software must be installed from the Sharpdesk Network Scanner Utilities CD ROM that accompanies the machine For the system requirements of the software see the manual PDF format or the Readme file on the CD ROM For the...

Page 709: ... or an application on a PC as a metadata file in XML format For the operating procedure see TRANSMITTING METADATA To use the Internet fax function the Internet fax expansion kit must be installed Installing the application integration module is required to use the metadata delivery function The application integration module can be combined with the network scanner to append a metadata file to a s...

Page 710: ... panel If the fax function will be used and in particular if reception or timer transmission will take place at night always keep the main power switch in the position Checking the date and time Verify that the correct date and time are set in the machine To set the date and time of the machine In Setting mode select System Settings Default Settings Clock Adjust If Disabling of Clock Adjustment ha...

Page 711: ...lect System Settings Image Send Settings Scan Settings Scan Settings Default Sender Set To store the sender s name and address In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Own Number and Name Set Sender Data Registration To configure server settings In Setting mode select Network Settings Services Settings Administrator rights are required To configure basic settin...

Page 712: ...RESS BOOK For how to use the address books and how to store addresses see the following item RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX...

Page 713: ...he machine To scan an image to your computer Network Scanner Tool must be running on your computer To install Network Scanner Tool see the Shapdesk Installation Guide that accompanies the machine When a standard installation is performed Network Scanner Tool is installed with Sharpdesk USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 71...

Page 714: ... preset period of time transmission will automatically be attempted again after a preset interval To cancel the transmission Do so from the job status screen STOPPING DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED To set the number of recall attempts and the interval between attempts when the connection cannot be established because the line is busy or for other reasons In Setting mode select System Setti...

Page 715: ...ode select System Settings Image Send Settings Internet Fax Settings Send Settings Recall in Case of Communication Error The factory default setting is two attempts at 3 minute intervals USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 715 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 716: ...end To change the screen that is initially displayed when the Image Send in the mode display is tapped In Setting mode administrator select System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Default Settings Default Display Setting Tap and then tap one of E mail FTP Desktop Network Folder and Internet Fax In Setting mode by selecting System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Default Set...

Page 717: ... The base screen layout slightly differs depending on how image is sent To set the screen that is initially displayed when the Image Send key is tapped In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Default Settings Default Display Setting USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 717 of 1441 3 17 2...

Page 718: ...GLASS Enter the destination Tap the address key to directly enter the destination and specify the address to send scan data RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M46...

Page 719: ...G THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE CHANGING THE RESOLUTION CHANGING FORMAT IN SCAN OR DATA ENTRY MODE CHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODE CHANGING COLOR MODE Set Others Use Others other than the time when using scan settings such as sending two pages as a ...

Page 720: ...nal is placed on the document glass Repeat the placing original and transmission procedures until all originals have been sent After scanning all originals tap the Read End key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 720 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 721: ...ight x 5 1 2 wid th 131 mm height x 140 mm wi dth 11 5 8 height x 39 3 8 wi dth 297 mm height x 1000 mm w idth Using the document glass 11 5 8 height x 17 width 297 mm height x 1000 mm w idth A long original can be transmitted USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 721 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 722: ... 1 2 x 8 1 2 A4 A3 Inch 2 11 x17 8 1 2 x13 216 mm x 330 mm 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 13 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 When an original of 8 1 2 x 14 in size is detected the image setting direction is automatically set so that it will be scanned starting from the top side Likewise when mixed size originals of 8 1 2 x 14 and 8 1 2 x 11 in size are detected all originals are automatically set so ...

Page 723: ...1 x 17 A3 A4 A4R A 5 B4 B5 B5R 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x 13 AB 3 A4 A4R A5 B4 8K 16K 16KR 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 17 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x 13 A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 8K 16K 16KR AB 4 A3 A4 A4R A5 B5 B5R 216 mm x 340 mm 8 1 2 x 13 2 5 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 17 216 mm x 340 mm 8 1 2 x 13 2 5 A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R AB 5 A3 A4 A4R A5 B5 B5R 216 mm x 343 mm 8 1 2 x 13 1 2 8 1 2 x 11 11 x 17 216 mm x 343 mm 8 1 2 x 13 1 2 A3 ...

Page 724: ...touch key shows the name of the destination and an icon indicating the mode used for the destination For information on the address book see ADDRESS BOOK For the procedure for storing an address in the address book see STORING CONTACTS or STORING GROUPS Fax Scan to E mail Internet Fax Direct SMTP Scan to FTP Scan to Network Folder Scan to Desktop Group key with multiple destinations Operation Tap ...

Page 725: ... when the destination is a contact or group in which multiple addresses are stored For more information see ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN If you select an incorrect destination Tap the key again to cancel the selection To select a destination from the transmission log tap the Select among addresses recently sent to key on the action panel USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND To retrieve a destination by using...

Page 726: ...ress key on the action panel VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS Tap the one touch key and then tap the Show Details key on the action panel to display the detailed information screen The destination for transmission can be selected by tapping a stored destination USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 726 of 1441 3 17...

Page 727: ...dress key on the action panel Confirm the destination After the confirmation is completed tap To confirm detailed information such as the type or name of the specified destination tap the one touch key of the target destination and then tap the Confirm Destination Information key To cancel a specified destination USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 dow...

Page 728: ...e key of the destination that you wish to cancel and tap the OK key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 728 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 729: ...number and enter the correct number The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book If you do not know the search number tap the Print Individual List key on the action panel to print and check the address list When entering search numbers such as 0001 and 0011 0 can be omitted For example to enter 0001 enter 1 and tap the OK key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N M...

Page 730: ... To switch among To Cc and Bcc tap You can select Bcc if Image Send Settings Scan Settings Scan Settings Bcc Setting Enable Bcc is enabled in System Settings In Internet Fax mode the reception report request screen will appear if Image Send Settings Internet Fax Settings Scan Settings Send Settings I Fax Reception Report On Off Setting is enabled in System Settings If you wish to receive a report ...

Page 731: ... to enter a user name and password check with your server administrator and enter the appropriate user name and password If a user authentication function other than authentication by user number is enabled the login name of the current user is automatically entered in the user name field Tap the Search key and enter a keyword to search for a workgroup server or network folder Up to 100 workgroups...

Page 732: ...ings are completed tap You will return to the screen of step 1 Tap the OK key again to accept the destination USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 732 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 733: ...Search key on the action panel Tap Destination and tap the LDAP server to be used If an authentication screen for the LDAP server appears enter your user name and password If only one LDAP server has been stored it is not necessary to take step 2 In this case start from step 3 After the settings are completed tap Tap of Object to select the object to be searched and tap Touch to USER S MANUAL MX M...

Page 734: ...r names starting with the entered letters An asterisk is used as follows XXX Names beginning with XXX XXX Names that end with XXX XXX Names containing XXX AA XX Names that start with AA and end with XX If no destination is found Tap the Search Again key to add more search letters To continuously add other destination Tap the destination USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sh...

Page 735: ...f the target destination and then tap the Confirm Destination Information key Tap to close the address information screen USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 735 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 736: ...esses recently sent to key on the action panel Tap the key of the destination to resend The last 50 addresses used for transmission are displayed If a screen requiring you to enter the user name and password appears enter the information When a destination for retransmission is selected in the transmission log screen the mode of the selected destination is automatically selected The following type...

Page 737: ... the Register New Address in Address Book the destination can be stored in the address book This is convenient if you have entered a destination directly USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 737 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 738: ... to E mail take care not to send a file that is too large In particular multi page files tend to be large When sending a multi page file or other large file it may be necessary to reduce the number of scanned pages or reduce the send size Do not place any objects under the original size detector Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector p...

Page 739: ...lace a large portrait oriented original place it as shown in the figure titled Landscape orientation and specify the placement orientation in step 5 Place 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5 size originals in portrait vertical orientation If placed in landscape horizontal orientation an incorrect size will be detected For an 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 R A5R size original enter the original size manually After a one touch key is ...

Page 740: ...p a target entry box or tap Options Change the subject file name reply name or mail text at scan transmission You can change exposure resolution file format color mode and other settings Tap their keys AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL 2 SIDED ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE ENLARGE REDUCE CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE CHANGING THE RESOLUTION CHANGING FORMAT IN SCAN...

Page 741: ...sheet or original pages with different sizes Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending the original If the file format is set to PDF Encrypt PDF Encrypt Emphasize Black Letter PDF Encrypt High Compression or PDF Encrypt High Compression Ultra Fine you will be prompted to enter the password when you tap the Start key Tap the Entry key to open the keyboard screen enter a pa...

Page 742: ...lution scan size and send size for each original page scanned However when Card Shot is selected in Others change only the exposure when scanning an even numbered original page USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 742 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 743: ...ings Network Scanner Settings in Setting mode are used If the reply to address is not changed the settings in System Settings Image Send Settings Scan Settings Default Sender Set in Setting mode are used If this is not configured the reply address configured in Network Settings Services Settings SMTP Settings Reply Address in the Setting mode is used Administrator rights are required To configure ...

Page 744: ...ify a user stored in the global address book in the same way as you would select the reply address Tapping the Direct Entry key allows you to directly enter the e mail Tap the Clear key If you wish to directly enter the text tap the Direct Entry key to open the soft keyboard Enter the text and tap the OK key If user authentication is being used the information of the user that logged in will be ap...

Page 745: ...ting mode Web version tap the Pre set Message key To directly enter the body text tap the Edit key To clear all entered text Tap the Clear All key When this key is tapped the entire body of the message is erased immediately not just the selected line Enter up to 1800 characters A line break counts as one character USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 do...

Page 746: ...line tap the Edit key The soft keyboard will appear with the selected text entered USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 746 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 747: ...ish to append pre set text such as a corporate policy To enter the text to append select Application Settings Network Scanner Settings Administration Settings and then Mail Footer Registration in Setting mode Administrator rights are required Enter up to 900 characters The appended text is not included in the maximum number of characters that can be entered in the e mail body To specify whether or...

Page 748: ...ace the original of the 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5 size in the portrait orientation If placed in landscape horizontal orientation an incorrect size will be detected For an 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 R A5R size original enter the original size manually SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE Rotation sending 8 1 2 x 11 and 5 1 2 x 8 1 2R A4 B5R and A5R originals are rotated 90 degrees and respectively sent in the...

Page 749: ... SUBJECT FILE NAME AND BODY TEXT AT THE TIME OF INTERNET FAX TRANSMISSION You can change exposure resolution file format color mode and other settings AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL 2 SIDED ORIGINAL CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE CHANGING THE RESOLUTION CHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODE CHANGING COLOR MODE Tapping the Others key allows you to configure various f...

Page 750: ...been scanned Tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending the original If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen is displayed scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved Tap the Change Setting ...

Page 751: ...exposure when scanning an even numbered original page USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 751 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 752: ...e Subject entry box Tap a pre set text key If the subject and file name are not changed the settings in the Setting mode Web version are used To configure the candidates for the subject file name and body text click Application Settings and then Network Scanner Settings in Setting mode To cancel the selection of the subject Tap the Clear key If you wish to directly enter the text tap the Direct En...

Page 753: ... settings are completed tap To select a pre set text previously stored in the Setting mode Web version tap the Pre set Message key To directly enter the body text tap the Edit key To clear all entered text Tap the Clear All key When this key is tapped the entire body of the message is erased immediately not just the selected line USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa ...

Page 754: ...to select on a line basis To edit the selected line tap the Edit key The soft keyboard will appear with the selected text entered USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 754 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 755: ...ast transmission the contact or group key can be simply tapped to retrieve multiple fax numbers You can also send faxes with the one touch key by setting the Set to the address as usually used checkbox to when addresses are registered If you wish to temporarily remove a destination from the stored addresses open the detail confirmation screen and remove the destination in the screen A transmission...

Page 756: ...to all destinations tap the Send Same Image as Fax Address key on the action panel To register destinations in a contact or group In the base screen or address book screen tap the Register Edit Address key on the action panel or tap the Register Edit Address in Address Book icon in the home screen For more information see STORING CONTACTS or STORING GROUPS One touch keys that cannot be used for br...

Page 757: ...e for the fax address to all destinations tap the Send Same Image as Fax Address key on the action panel If you wish to send the same image Mono2 as the one for the Internet fax address to all destinations tap the Send Same Image as I Fax Address key on the action panel To cancel a specified destination Tap the key of the destination that you wish to cancel to release the selection Tap the Preview...

Page 758: ...ach page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 758 of 1441 3 1...

Page 759: ...mode if the color mode setting is Full Color the original is sent in M ono2 to Internet fax destinations and in color to scan destinations If the facsimile expansion kit is enabled tap the Send Same Image as Fax Add ress key on the action panel to send the original in Mono2 If the Internet fax expansion kit is enabled tap the Send Same Image as Fax Address key on the action panel to send an origin...

Page 760: ...th an appropriate function Dropout color This mode is available for Scanner and Data entry It is linked to a mode with a n appropriate function USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 760 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 761: ...ing the key of the completed broadcast transmission tap the Check Details of Selected Job key on the action panel If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes the same broadcast transmission key will appear in each of those modes Broadcast xxxx will appear as the destination of the broadcast job key The job control number that appeared on the touch panel when scanning end...

Page 762: ...ocument filing You will return to the document filing resend screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered Perform the document filing resend procedure There is no need to re scan the original Not using document filing You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered Place the original and perform the steps of the broadcast transmission USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M4...

Page 763: ...smission log displayed in the Log Viewer For the procedures for using this function see the PC Fax driver Help To send an Internet fax using the PC I Fax function the PC Fax driver must be installed and then updated using the CD ROM that accompanies the Internet fax expansion kit For more information see the Software Setup Guide This function can only be used on a Windows computer This function is...

Page 764: ...t to check the binding edge of the original and select the key to be tapped Tap the Image Orientation key with the same orientation as the placed original If this setting is not correct a suitable image may not be transmitted After the settings are completed tap The settings on 2 sided scanning are cleared when transmission has completed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica s...

Page 765: ...l type Tablet key or the 2 Sided original type Book key that has been forcibly displayed and cancel the display USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 765 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 766: ...ample if the scan size is 8 1 2 x 11 A4 and the send size is 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 B5 the image will be reduced before transmission Only standard original sizes can be automatically detected Standard sizes When the original size is an inch size or a non standard size or if the size is not detected correctly manually specify the original scan size SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE USER S MANU...

Page 767: ...SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 767 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 768: ...te original size key After the settings are completed tap When Long Size is selected the 2 sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed The image is sent in Mono2 only When Postcard Photo Size or a standard size direct entry is selected send size cannot be changed If you are sending a long original tap the Long Size key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa ...

Page 769: ...he maximum width that can be scanned is 39 3 8 1 000 mm the maximum height is 11 5 8 297 mm TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 769 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 770: ...7 mm Operation Tap the Original key After tapping the Scan Size key tap the Direct Entry key Specify the original size When the scan size is specified by numeric values the send size cannot be specified Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively and enter the sizes using the numeric keys It is convenient to use to finely adjust the entered size USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX ...

Page 771: ...ck that the specified size is displayed on the Original key After the settings are completed tap twice USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 771 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 772: ... Tap the Send Size key Tap the desired send size key After the settings are completed tap The send size cannot be specified when Long Size is selected for the scan size or when the scan size is specified by numeric values The send size cannot be specified when TIFF S is selected for the format in Internet fax mode The send size is fixed at 8 1 2 x 11 R A4R USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N ...

Page 773: ... Send Size You cannot tap size keys that are unavailable for the Send Size To configure the default setting of image orientation select System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Default Settings Image Orientation in Setting mode The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the Scan Size and the Send Size USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER ...

Page 774: ...en the original consists of light text How to select the original type Scan mode Data entry mode Item Description Auto The original image type is automatically selected to match the origi nal When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages change the exposure setting each time you change pages When using the automatic document feeder the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanni...

Page 775: ...tos Printed Photo This mode is best for scanning printed photographs such as photos in a magazine or catalogue Map This mode is best for copying maps with light color shading and fine text Operation Tap the Exposure key Tap the key assigned to the original type you wish to set based on the original type Tap to adjust the exposure After the settings are completed tap When Auto is selected changing ...

Page 776: ... adjust the exposure After the settings are completed tap When Auto is selected the exposure will be set to 3 USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 776 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 777: ... IN SCAN OR DATA ENTRY MODE CHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODE SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE Operation Tap the Resolution key Tap the key of the desired resolution When using the automatic document feeder the resolution setting cannot be changed after scanning has begun However when Job Build is used in Others change the resolution each time a new set of originals is inserted When using ...

Page 778: ... Folder are set to the same mode In the Internet Fax mode set the Half Tone checkbox to to specify half tone This option is unavailable if 200x100dpi is selected This function sends an image with a higher quality than usual when scanning an original with many grayscale parts such as photographs or colored illustrations USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals...

Page 779: ... High Compression PDF A PDF A High Compression PDF A Ultra Fine PDF A Encrypted PDF Encrypted PDF Encrypt High Compression PDF Encrypted PDF Encrypt High Compression Ultra Fine PDF Encrypted PDF TIFF TIFF JPEG TIFF XPS XPS The scanner function expansion kit is required The file type of B W mode and the file type of Color Grayscale mode are linked The file type cannot be set separately for each Whe...

Page 780: ...mpression Ultra Fine specified all files for the scanner will be sent as High Compression PDF Ultra Fine files If High Compression PDF is specified the resolution cannot be changed in the scanner mode The resolution is set to 300 x 300 dpi If PDF High Compression is set when a resolution setting has been specified in scanner or other mode the resolution setting will be canceled and the High Compre...

Page 781: ...ile format with the color mode set to Full Color or Grayscale When Color Grayscale mode is selected and the scanner function expansion kit is installed the Compact and U Fine checkboxes appear To suppress image quality deterioration and reduce the data size of a file to be transmitted select High Compression PDF Select U Fine only when you select High Compression PDF USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465...

Page 782: ...ces the data size while suppressing deterioration of black text When a checkmark does not appear in the Specified Pages per File checkbox one file is created for all scanned pages When Specified Pages per File is selected consecutive numbers are added to the created file names When JPEG is selected for the file type one file is created for each page For this reason the Specified Pages per File che...

Page 783: ...00x100dpi and 200x200dpi If TIFF S is selected after 200x400dpi 400x400dpi or 600x600dpi is selected the resolution automatically changes to 200x200dpi Send size Always 8 1 2 x 11 R A4R If TIFF S is selected after the send size is changed the send size is automatically fixed to 8 1 2 x 11 R A4R If a size larger than 8 1 2 x 11 A4 is scanned the size will automatically be reduced to 8 1 2 x 11 R A4...

Page 784: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 784 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 785: ...nned as black or white This mode is best for text only originals Grayscale The colors in the original are scanned in black and white as shades of gray gra yscale Operation Tap the Color Mode key Tap the key of the desired color mode for the original This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode If there is a mix of destinations in different send modes tap to select a send mode E mail DeskTop F...

Page 786: ...ginals Note that if the file format is set to JPEG scanning will take place in grayscale After the settings are completed tap The B W mode can be set only when the Auto key is selected in the color mode setting step 2 USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 786 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 787: ...ution to scan the original while checking it in the preview screen you can send a better quality original to the destination Depending on the size of the transmission data part of the preview image may not appear in the preview screen in the touch panel The preview function is not available when the original size is set to Long Size USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpu...

Page 788: ...stored Enter the address of each branch office Select Dual Page Scan Specify Erase Tap the Start key Scan and send the original Tap the key of a stored program Tap the Start key Scan and send the original Considerable time is required to send the docum ents each month because the above settings mu st be selected In addition mistakes are occasionally made when selecting the settings When a program ...

Page 789: ...s used for transmission The same settings can be used repeatedly for transmission The following contents cannot be stored in programs Tapping of the Speaker key Custom sizes Card shot Page changes and unspecified erases during preview Metadata Entry Send settings Own Name Select Up to 48 programs can be stored Up to 500 destinations can be stored in one program A program in which sub addresses and...

Page 790: ...d transmission have ended If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key When stored in the program this cannot be additionally specified Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more informat...

Page 791: ...Operation Place the original This function cannot be used in scan mode or data entry mode The 2in1 is only available for originals with a size other than a standard size 8 1 2 x 11 A4 or 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 B5 or A5 Transmission is not possible at a size smaller than the original size When the scan size of the original is specified by numeric values this function cannot be used This function cannot be u...

Page 792: ... A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the Others key and tap the 2in1 key A checkmark appears on the icon After the settings are completed tap the Back key Tap the Original key Tap the Image Orientation key with the same orientation as the placed original If this setting is not correct a suitable image may not be transmitted After the settings are completed tap To cancel th...

Page 793: ...en scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED Tap the Change Setting key in the scan end confirmation screen to change the exposure resolution scan size and send size However when scanning each eve...

Page 794: ... A3 and B4 A3 and B5 B4 and A4 and A4 and B5 A4R and B5 B4 and A4R B4 and A5 and B5 and A5 Operation Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document When Mixed Size Original is selected an original scan size cannot be specified After the original scan size has been selected Mixed Size Original cannot be specified Rotate cannot be used when Mixed Size Original is enabled Th...

Page 795: ...ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the Mixed Size Original key Otherwise tap the Others key and tap the Mixed Size Original key A checkmark appears on the icon After the settings are completed tap the Back key Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original To cancel the Mixed Size Original setting Tap the Mixed Size Original key to clear the checkmark Tap the Preview key to c...

Page 796: ...ed information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 796 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 797: ... Place a card face down on the document glass DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination If the scan size is larger than the send size it will result in a sending failure The ratio cannot be specified and Rotation Sending Setting cannot be selected USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 797 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 798: ...ight sizes respectively and enter the sizes using the numeric keys To quickly set the size first specify a value close to the desired ratio value by the numeric keys then tap or for adjustment To enlarge or reduce the images to fit the paper based on the entered original size tap the Fit to Send Size key After selecting Card Shot tap the Original key in the base screen to change the original scan ...

Page 799: ... information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen Before scanning the back of the card tap the Change Setting key on the touch panel to change the exposure If you will continue by scanning the front of the card you can tap the Change Setting key to change the exposure resolution scan size and send size USER S MANUAL MX ...

Page 800: ...automatic document feeder When scanning originals that are separated into sets scan the set that has the first page first The settings that you select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets Operation Up to 999 pages can be scanned Note that when the memory is being used for other jobs fewer pages can be scanned If the memory becomes full during scanning a message will appear and the ...

Page 801: ... Build key A checkmark appears on the icon Tap the Start key to scan the first set Place the next set of originals and tap the Additionally Scan key To cancel the Job Build setting Tap the Job Build key to clear the checkmark Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for this function can...

Page 802: ...e tapped to change the exposure resolution scan size and send size for each original page scanned However when Job Build is used in combination with 2in1 in Others only the exposure can be changed when scanning each even numbered page of the original pages USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 802 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 803: ... the original must be placed on the document glass Original scan size Transmitted image 11 x 17 A3 x 1 page 8 1 2 x 11 A4 x 2 pages Operation Place the original on the document glass DOCUMENT GLASS This function is available when the original size setting is set to Auto Note that Center Erase and Edge Center Erase cannot be used USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa c...

Page 804: ...ATION ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the Others key and tap the Dual Page Scan key A checkmark appears on the icon After the settings are completed tap the Back key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 804 of ...

Page 805: ... ended To cancel the Dual Page Scan setting Tap the Dual Page Scan key to clear the checkmark Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Man...

Page 806: ...on Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Specify the destination RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to Auto The document glass is not available for this function USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S ...

Page 807: ...is correct After the settings are completed tap Tap the Start key to start scanning of the original A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended To cancel the Book Divide setting Tap the Off key Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for this function cannot ...

Page 808: ...r or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 808 of 14...

Page 809: ...al pages in the document feeder tray all pages are scanned A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended If you placed the original on the document glass scan each page one at a To cancel the background suppression settings Tap the Off key Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTE...

Page 810: ...p will sound to indicate that transmission has ended When the color mode setting is Mono2 the suppress background function will not operate USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 810 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 811: ...on RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpu...

Page 812: ...e at a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended To cancel the contrast settings Tap the Off key Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IM...

Page 813: ...nation RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sh...

Page 814: ...t a time When scanning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended To cancel the sharpness settings Tap the Off key Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAG...

Page 815: ...ATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the Others key and then tap the Drop Out Color key This function cannot be used in fax and Internet fax mode USER S MANUAL MX M365N M...

Page 816: ...canned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended To cancel the Drop Out Color setting Tap the Drop Out Color key to clear the checkmark Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED Tap the Change Setting key in the scan end confirmation screen to ch...

Page 817: ... Not using the erase function Using the erase function Shadows appear in the image No shadows appear Erase modes This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 817 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 818: ...age where shadows tend to form but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows For example if you set an erase width of 1 2 10 mm and reduce the image to 70 before scanning it the erase width will be reduced to 7 mm To change the default erase width setting In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Default Settings Erase Width Adjustment The width can be ...

Page 819: ...th Specify the erase edge on the reverse side when erasing edges of one to three sides of Up Down Left and Right on the front side to scan a 2 sided original If the Reverse erase position of back face checkbox is set to the edge in the position opposite to the erased edge on the front side will be erased If the Reverse erase position of back face checkbox is set to the edge in the same position as...

Page 820: ...all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended reverse side and enter the area using the numeric keys To quickly set the area first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys then adjust it with To cancel the erase settings Tap the Clear key Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a...

Page 821: ...ecify the destination RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK When slow scan mode is selected 2 sided scanning is not possible If the originals are inserted with too much force they may crumple...

Page 822: ...and transmission have ended To cancel the Slow Scan Mode setting Tap the Slow Scan Mode key to clear the checkmark Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com po...

Page 823: ...inations including fax and Internet fax destinations this function is applied to scan mode destinations only Depending on the original some pages that are not blank may be detected as blank pages and thus not sent and some pages that are blank may not be detected as blank and thus sent This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode If the Send Same Image as Fax Address key is tapped this functi...

Page 824: ...ECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Tap the Others key and tap the Blank Page Skip key Tap the Skip Blank Page or Skip Blank and Back Shadow key After the settings are completed tap and Back keys in sequence To cancel the blank page skip setting Tap the Off key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sh...

Page 825: ...blank pages in C For example if five original sheets that include two blank pages are scanned by duplex scanning A will show 5 B will show 10 and C will show 8 Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED If this step is not performed within one minute after the above confirmation screen appears the scanned ...

Page 826: ...SS MANUALLY SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets not the number of scanned original pages For example when a 2 sided original is transmitted the number 1 will appear to indicate that one original sheet is transmitted not 2 to indicate the front side page and the reverse side page Whe...

Page 827: ...transmission To cancel the Original Count setting Tap the Original Count key to clear the checkmark Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED However settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen If this function is combined with Job Build the count result is displayed after the Read ...

Page 828: ...ey in the message screen to clear all scanned data Scan settings and destination settings will not be cleared Insert the original sheets in the document feeder tray again and tap the Start key to re scan USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 828 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 829: ... SELECTED DESTINATIONS To use the verification stamp function the optional stamp unit must be installed When 2 sided originals are used the front of each original is stamped twice If an error occurs during scanning an original that was not scanned may be stamped When the O mark that is stamped on originals starts to become faint replace the stamp cartridge For the procedure for replacing the stamp...

Page 830: ...tart key to start scanning of the original A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended To cancel the Verification Stamp setting Tap the Verification Stamp key on the action panel or Others key and tap the Verification Stamp key to clear the checkmark Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO ...

Page 831: ...ct System Settings Default Settings Clock Adjust Sender name sender address In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Own Number and Name Set Sender Data Registration If you intend to use the I Fax Own Address Send function be sure to configure this information Page numbers Select whether or not to include page numbers using System Settings Image Send Settings I...

Page 832: ... the scan size so it may be reduced or divided onto two pages when printed by the receiving machine USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 832 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 833: ...in the setting mode Select different conditions for a transmission as required Operation Place the original Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder or on the document glass AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS This function cannot be used in ...

Page 834: ... transaction report are as follows Always Print A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails Print at Error A transaction report is printed when transmission fails Do not Print Do not print a transaction report Set the Print Original Image checkbox to to include part of the transmitted original in the transaction report Reporting printing is not available fo...

Page 835: ...anning finishes place the next original and tap the Start key Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER...

Page 836: ... switch is in the position at the specified time transmission will not take place When performing a timer transmission you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission It is not possible to leave the document in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and have it scanned at the reserved time of transmission Up to 100 timer transmissions can be stored at once Settin...

Page 837: ...al image and settings are stored in the built in hard drive If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives the timer transmission will begin after that transmission is finished If a job scheduled for timer transmission is given priority on the job status screen the timer will be canceled The transmission will begin as soon as the job in progress is completed PRIORITY PROCES...

Page 838: ... A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended and the machine The setting will show the current time If the time is different correct it in the setting mode before starting a job BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER To cancel the Timer Transmission settings Tap the Off key Tap the Preview key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax For more information see CHECKING THE IMAGE TO ...

Page 839: ...il all pages have been scanned and then tap the Read End key A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended and the machine stands by for transmission The original is scanned into memory The original cannot be scanned at a specified time USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 839 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 840: ...ing Activity Report are erased when the report is printed and thus it cannot be reprinted When the Image Sending Activity Report is erased the log is reset The Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reach 200 again the report is printed To configure the image sending activity report In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Internet Fax Settings Default...

Page 841: ...t fax was sent from a party that is blocked NG REPORT A receive report was requested for a transmission however the transmissi on did not take place correctly and a transmission failed report was receiv ed NO REPORT A receive report was requested for a transmission however a report was not received within the timeout time NG LIMIT Transmission was not possible because the file size exceeded the ma...

Page 842: ... If the machine is out of paper or there is no paper that matches the size of the received fax a message will appear in the touch panel Follow the instructions in the message to load an appropriate size of paper You can print the received Internet fax data at the specified time PRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIME You can print the received Internet fax data when a password has been entered ...

Page 843: ...The fax is automatically printed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 843 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 844: ...y initiate reception Tap the Receive key to connect to the mail server and retrieve received faxes The Receive key can be tapped only when POP3 server settings are configured in the Setting mode administrator USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 844 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 845: ...etting for received data print In Setting mode select System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Default Settings Hold Setting for Received Data Print To display the received data list screen after entering the password In Setting mode select System Settings Operation Settings Job Detail Settings Preview Setting Received Data Image Check Setting To transfer received data to another mac...

Page 846: ...rd entry screen will appear as for printing Forwarding will not take place unless the password is entered USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 846 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 847: ...automatically deleted from memory If the power is turned off at the specified time printing will start at the timing when the power is turned on This function can be specified when the Received Data Image Check Setting is enabled If Hold Setting for Received Data Print is enabled this function cannot be used USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 download...

Page 848: ... of Received Data To disable the hold setting for received data print In Setting mode disable this function using System Settings Image Send Settings Operation Settings Default Settings Hold Setting for Received Data Print USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 848 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 849: ...Fax Data permission The received data list can also be shown in the job status screen that appears when you tap the job status display The received data can be forwarded deleted or saved from Received Data List FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY SAVING RECEIVED DATA In the System Information select the Event Information tab and tap the Check Fax Reception Image key You can also display the received...

Page 850: ...o Other Destination key FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY To save the selected received image tap the File key SAVING RECEIVED DATA Tap the image you wish to print and tap the Print key on the action panel A preview image is an image for the touch panel It will differ from the actual print result Tap the Erase Specified Range key to delete unwanted area of the image Specify the image area you wish...

Page 851: ...re successfully printed only those pages that were not printed will be forwarded If forwarding was not successful because the transmission was canceled or a communication error occurred the faxes that were to be forwarded will return to the machine s the print queue If a password entry screen appears after tapping the OK key Hold Setting for Received Data Print has been enabled Enter the password ...

Page 852: ...Tap the Internet Fax Settings key Tap the Execute key in Forward Received Data to begin forwarding USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 852 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 853: ... that the setting mode Web version has been accessed with administrator rights Operation Whether or not to forward data for each forwarding table can be quickly set In Setting mode select Application Settings Forward Received Data and tap Valid Invalid on the displayed forwarding table to switch the settings When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination the dat...

Page 854: ...ring editing and deleting forwarding tables in this screen and from specifying which table is used To do so set the checkboxes for the following items to Disable Registration of Forward Table Disable Change Delete of Forward Table Disable Change of Forward Approval Specify in Print Style Setting whether or not to have the machine to print the faxes to forward when inbound routing is enabled After ...

Page 855: ...ow Select the appropriate senders from the list and click the Add button If you wish to have only faxes from specified addresses forwarded store the desired sender addresses Send addresses stored here can be selected from a list when you store a forwarding table A maximum of 500 sender numbers addresses can be stored To delete an entered address select the address in Address to be Entered and clic...

Page 856: ...en you select the recipients from the address book up to 400 recipients can be registered for network folder FTP Desktop Internet fax and fax Enter a recipient directly and specify the recipient Up to three forwarding day and time settings can be set for one forwarding table and a forwarding destination can be set for each set time To configure these settings use the Forwarding Destination List ta...

Page 857: ...ettings in Setting mode Web version Select Always Forward or Forward on Selected Day Time from the forwarding table The forwarding permission settings that appear here are linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 10 If you wish to use different forwarding conditions than those set in step 10 set the forwarding permission settings Click Store To use the inbound routing function enable the fo...

Page 858: ...of Storage and click the Save button Settings for saving received faxes to the hard disk Up to 500 files can be stored in one folder as received data The faxreceive folder contains files of Inbound Routing HDD Storage Settings Received data is saved in the folder specified in Specify folder in Inbound Routing HDD Storage Settings in Application Settings If there is no specified folder a folder is ...

Page 859: ...s Confidential reception and polling reception faxes cannot be saved Depending on the setting received faxes that cannot be saved because of the file number limit or other reason are either printed or saved in the inbound routing error box USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 859 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 860: ... received images Thumbnail screen The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode In the System Information tap the Event Information tab and tap the Check Fax Reception Image key You can also display the received data list by tapping the job status display and tapping the Check Received Data key on the action panel of Job Status screen Tap the key of the received dat...

Page 861: ...tap the Check Image key on the action panel and check the image on the preview screen Select the destination from the Address Book screen and tap the Start key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 861 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 862: ...is enabled in Setting mode The factory default setting is disabled Operation When data is received is shown at the top of the screen The received data is listed In the System Information tap the Event Information tab and tap the Check Fax Reception Image key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 862 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 863: ...Check Received Data key on the action panel of Job Status screen Tap the key of the received data you wish to save and tap the File key on the action panel When you select a single received data only you can tap the Check Image key on the action panel and check the image on the preview screen Set the file information and tap the Save key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica s...

Page 864: ...OB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS Internet fax jobs include reception timer transmission and data forwarding as well as usual transmission For information on jobs in Internet fax mode see COMPLETED TRANSMISSION RECEPTION JOBS USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com ...

Page 865: ...being printed at the specified time the job being printed is prioritized over the timer job Internet Fax transmission job with reception report request specified An Internet Fax transmission job with a reception report request specified excluding a direct SMTP transmission job is placed into the standby state at the bottom of the Job Queue screen after a transmission has been completed Completed W...

Page 866: ... the status field displays In Memory in the completed job list After the fax is printed the status changes to Received Then a job is added for which the status field displays Waiting in the job queue list When forwarding the received fax is completed the field changes to Forward OK USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 866 of...

Page 867: ... file is created in XML format By linking the metadata with applications such as document management software a workflow application or an encryption server a sophisticated document solution environment can be built Using the application integration module kit information on a generated image file can be entered at the touch panel and transmitted along with the image as an XML file USER S MANUAL M...

Page 868: ... configured in a metadata set A stored metadata set can be selected at the time of transmission Addresses specified in Address Type Allowing Metadata Entry when a metadata set is stored can be selected as transmission destinations at the time of transmission using one touch keys manual entry or a global address book search Addresses for which metadata entry is not allowed cannot be specified as tr...

Page 869: ...mation see the Network Scanner Tool User s Guide PDF format on the Sharpdesk Network Scanner Utilities CD ROM For information on the license agreement and how to use the CD ROM that accompanies the application integration module see the separate Sharpdesk license kit manual Using third party applications Various types of third party applications exist Some applications can start automatically from...

Page 870: ...smission without sending metadata switch the screen from data entry mode to a different mode and then perform transmission When metadata settings have been configured or an address is specified in data entry mode it will not be possible to switch to another mode Before configuring metadata settings specify addresses in all available modes After metadata settings have been configured specify only a...

Page 871: ... settings and perform the scan send procedure Configure job detail settings and then start transmission using the same operations as in other modes When directly entering an address tap Touch to enter a file name to display the screen for selecting an address type If the address type such as E mail Internet Fax Fax Network Folder or Direct SMTP is selected the address type entry screen appears To ...

Page 872: ...on in the related items of the send settings Name entered in metadata fields Description Where entered formName Name of the user who sent the job If t he name is not entered as metadata t he sender name determined by the us ual rules for determining the sender na me will be applied as metadata Reply To sender name of selected sender replyTo E mail address to which the transmissi on result will be ...

Page 873: ...entry screen in the setting mode Web version Blank until a value is set in the send s ettings screen USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 873 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 874: ... of document filing Using the document filing function allows you to additionally print out conference material with the same settings or print out ledger sheets used for routine tasks as required Additionally printing out conference material with the same settings Printing out ledger sheets as required A PDF file created for PC browsing can be displayed or printed on a computer USER S MANUAL MX M...

Page 875: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 875 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 876: ...t want others to use File As a copy image send or other job is performed this function saves the docu ment data to the hard drive Unlike Quick File various types of information ca n be appended to the file when the file is saved to enable efficient file manage ment A password can also be established Scan to HDD This function scans an original and stores it to the hard drive Like File variou s type...

Page 877: ...assign a file name A password can also be set when storing a file Confidential save as required Custom Folder Folders with custom names are stored inside this folder Scanned documents are stored in the stored folder Like the Main folder a custom folder allows you to specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name when storing a job Passwords can be established for custom folders and f...

Page 878: ...fy it as a location for storing files Specify a password for the user folder as required Enter the password to use the folder My Folder A previously created custom folder can be selected as My Folder or a new fol der created as My Folder When My Folder has been configured and user au thentication is used My Folder will always be selected as the destination of Fi le and File Store To store a custom...

Page 879: ... original Text and photo exampl e Size A4 Max 5700 Max 3000 Black white original Text Size A4 Max 13000 Number of pages and number of files that can be stored in the Quick File folder Examples of original types Number of pages Number of files Full color original Text and photo exampl e Max 700 Max 1000 USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manu...

Page 880: ...Quick File folder it may not be possible to perform a large copy job using sort mode Delete unnecessary files from the Quick File Folder The original types above are examples to make the explanation easier to understand The actual number of pages and number of files that can be stored will vary depending on the contents of the original images and the settings when the files are stored USER S MANUA...

Page 881: ...ocument Filing Settings Automatic Deletion of File Settings To check the set deletion cycle In Setting mode select System Settings List Print Administrator Settings List and print a list of the administrator settings including document filing settings To check information on the folders selected for file deletion In Setting mode select System Settings List Print User and print a list of the folder...

Page 882: ...ring property Protect Once Protect is set its file cannot be edited moved an d deleted No password setting is required The protected fi les are identified by in each mode Confidential You can set a password 5 to 32 digits long for file protecti on The confidential files are identified by in each m ode The above information cannot be specified when a file is saved with Quick File To store a user na...

Page 883: ...m obtaining the password The property of a stored Confidential file can be changed to Sharing by Property Change as required Do not store sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be used by others Except in cases provided for by law SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages that result from the disclosure of sensitive information due to manipulation by a third party...

Page 884: ... of the keys shown at the right to scan and save the original File key and Quick File key These keys may not appear on the action panel depending on the mode or settings In this case tap the Others key on the base screen in each mode and then tap the Quick File or File key To change the screen display In Setting mode Web version select System Settings Operation Settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M...

Page 885: ...INT FILES Force retention document filing in PRINTER Using document filing in PC Fax PC I Fax mode To use document filing in PC Fax or PC I Fax mode select document filing settings in the PC Fax driver For more information see Help in the PC Fax driver USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 885 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 886: ...BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODE USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 886 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 887: ...ing Quick File the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file User Name User Unknown File Name Mode_Day Month Year_Hour Minute Second Example Copy_20140404_112030 Stored to Quick File Folder When user authentication is used the user name that was used for login is automatically selected Only the file name and location of a file stored in the Quick File folder can be c...

Page 888: ...al saving of the file the message The scanned data is stored in the quick file folder appears for 6 seconds default setting after the Start key is tapped To change the message display time select System Settings in Setting mode Operation Settings Message Time Setting To cancel Quick File Tap the Quick File key to enable USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portal...

Page 889: ... document glass SELECTING A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINAL Tap the File key to append file information To select the user name file name folder and property setting see File Information To save on the HDD When a file is stored using File without appending file information the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the fi...

Page 890: ...sh to assign a user name or other information to the file go to the next step Tap You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the File key will be highlighted Select copy settings and then tap the Start key Simultaneously with starting copy the original is stored as a file The selected copy settings are also saved For the procedure for placing the original see step 1 in SELECTING A USER S ...

Page 891: ...ing files When a file is saved to the Main folder or a custom folder Sharing Protect or Confidential can be selected Sharing A Sharing file can be changed to Protect or Confidential using Propert y Change in the Job Settings Protect Protect does not require setting of a password but prevents a file from bein g moved deleted or edited A password cannot be established The icon ap pears with the mode...

Page 892: ...be first set by selecting User Control in Setting mode User List Tap The system goes back to the screen of step 1 to display the selected user name Assigning a file name required However a Protect file that is saved in the Quick File folder can only be changed to Sharing A file that is saved in the Quick File folder cannot be changed to Confidential If the file is moved to the Main folder or a cus...

Page 893: ...DF for PC browsing Tap the Create PDF for PC Browsing checkbox to and a public PDF for PC browsing will be created when the file is saved File Name If a file name that already exists is specified a tilde and a serial number are added after the file name and this file is saved as a different file The file name is not case sensitive For example if the test txt file already exists and you specify the...

Page 894: ...r Tap the Start key to start scanning A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and file store have ended For original scan settings see the explanation of the copy or image send mode If the original is 2 sided be sure to tap the Original key and then tap the 2 Sided Tablet key or the 2 Sided Booklet key as appropriate for the original USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica s...

Page 895: ...le name and a folder Tap the Start key to start scanning A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and file store have ended For original scan settings see the explanation of the copy or image send mode If the original is 2 sided be sure to tap the Original key and then tap the 2 Sided Tablet key or the 2 Sided Booklet key as appropriate for the original USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N ...

Page 896: ...you wish to retrieve When the folder is selected the files in the folder will appear Select the file that you wish to retrieve Select a file from the thumbnail images of the stored files FILE SELECTION SCREEN SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE Retrieve a file using the search function FILE SEARCH AND RETRIEVAL Also in setting mode Web version you can use document filing In setting mode Web version click...

Page 897: ...gure settings FILE SELECTION SCREEN FILE PRINTING FILE TRANSMISSION FILE MOVING DELETE FILE FILE IMAGE CHECKING FILE MERGING USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 897 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 898: ...t screen format or Thumbnail screen format to display thumbnail images of files List display mode Thumbnail display mode Mode icons USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 898 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 899: ... to FTP Scan to De sktop Scan to Network Folder PC Fax Send PC I Fax S end Edit When different types of jobs such as copy a nd fax are combined USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 899 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 900: ... of 32 digits and tap the Tap the Print Now key to printed out the file with the settings used for its storage Tap the By Job Display key to display the keys of a particular mode such as copy or scanner mode enabling quick data search Tap the File Name key the User Name key or the Date key to change the order of display of the files Select User Control in Setting mode Authority Group List Then in ...

Page 901: ...ckbox to The setting cannot be changed to 2in1 or Pamphlet Copy in a stored file Printing is not available when a long size document is saved in Scan to HDD Scan to External Memory Device E mail FTP Desktop or Network Folder Printing is available when the data saved in E mail FTP Desktop or Network Folder includes a Fax or Internet Fax broadcasting address If print settings are changed when a stor...

Page 902: ...E Tap the Choose Print Settings key Change the print settings For more information see OVERVIEW Select the Delete checkbox when needed Tap the Start key The file will be printed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 902 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 903: ...y key and change the value using the numeric keys To delete the file after printing tap the Delete checkbox to set to Tap the Start key to start printing Confidential files cannot be printed simultaneously with other files A file in the currently selected folder cannot be selected simultaneously with a file in a different folder If the job type is changed with the By Job Display key or the screen ...

Page 904: ...e Apply the If you have selected System Settings in Setting mode Document Filing Settings Batch Print Settings and disabled the Selection of All Users is not allowed checkbox and Selection of User Unknown is not allowed checkbox select the All Users key and User Unknown key If you tap the All Users key all files in the folder the files of all users are selected If you tap the User Unknown key all ...

Page 905: ...To automatically delete the file after printing tap the Delete key Tap the Start key to start printing If there are no files that match the search conditions you will return to the file list screen It the Delete the Data key on the action panel is tapped all files that match the current search conditions will be deleted USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portal...

Page 906: ...any of the following other modes were included in the saved file the file cannot be transmitted Pamphlet Copy Covers Inserts Photo Repeat Multi Page Enlargement 2in1 for copying If any of the following other modes were included in the saved file the file can be transmitted but other functions cannot be executed Margin Shift Transparency Inserts Book Copy Tab Copy Stamp all Color Adjust menu items ...

Page 907: ...d key on the action panel Select settings for sending Tap the Start key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 907 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 908: ...below SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE Tap the Move key on the action panel Tap the Move to key A file whose property is Protect cannot be moved To move a protected file change its property to Sharing or Confidential USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 908 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 909: ...the Quick File folder With this procedure the original name is changed and the file is moved to the specified folder Unlike the Save As command on a computer the file is not copied to the specified folder with the original file remaining in the original location To change the file name tap the File Name key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads...

Page 910: ...CTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE Tap the Delete key Check the file and then tap the Yes key A file whose property is Protect cannot be deleted To delete a protected file change its property to Sharing or Confidential USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 910 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 911: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 911 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 912: ...een on the touch panel A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel It will differ from the actual print result The image check screen does not appear when multiple files are selected The following data cannot be divided into chapters in edit mode Fax or Internet fax data File merged data Long original data USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com porta...

Page 913: ...Check the image of the file USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 913 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 914: ...o select the user name file name folder and property setting see File Information Changing the property If you have only selected a single file the File Merge key is not displayed The file name is a combination of the first file name a tilde and a serial number As required change the file name at a later time USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloa...

Page 915: ...of files starts and after the processing is finished the Files combined message appears To cancel the operation Tap the Cancel key Note that the operation cannot be canceled when the original file is being deleted after the files are combined USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 915 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 916: ...ion Tap the job status display Tap the tab with a file to be retrieved and tap the Complete key Tap the key of the desired file from the completed job A file that has been processed by Quick File or File can be selected for a job in the retrieve operation Tap the Send or Choose Print Settings key on the action panel FILE TRANSMISSION FILE PRINTING USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S ht...

Page 917: ...a file select the file and then tap the Check Details of Selected Job key on the action panel USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 917 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 918: ...Searching is possible even when you only know part of the file name or folder name As required a folder can also be specified as a search range Example Only part of a file name is known Meeting Operation To search for a specific folder tap its key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 918 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 919: ... name on the soft keyboard that appears and tap the OK key File or Folder Name Search using the file name or folder name Enter the file name or folder name on the soft keyboard that appears and tap the OK key Date Search using the date when the file was created If the folder with a password is tapped a password entry screen will appear Enter the password 5 to 8 digits using the numeric keys USER S...

Page 920: ...tap the Search Again key When you search using File or Folder Name custom folders that match the search characters will also appear in the list When a folder key is tapped a list of the files in the folder appears Tap the desired file in the list Also in setting mode Web version you can use the file search function Click Document Operations in Setting Mode Web version Document Filing Search USER S...

Page 921: ...Select File from USB Memory to Print or Select File from Network Folder to Print key Operation Printing a file on an FTP server Printing a file in a USB memory Printing a file in the network folder of a PC Printing a file on an FTP server Tap the Select File from FTP to Print key on the action panel Select an FTP server USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portal...

Page 922: ...ect File from USB Memory to Print key on the action panel Select a file or folder Change the print settings For more information see FILE PRINTING Select the Delete checkbox when needed To fit the image to the paper size when printing select the Fit To Page checkbox Tap the Start key to start file printing Printing a file in the network folder of a PC USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER ...

Page 923: ...lder on the keyboard the folder having that path appears Go to step 4 Select an FTP server A Displays the workgroup selection screen Select a network folder To manually select from the folder list tap Refer to Folders on Network in the action panel USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 923 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 924: ...irst level of the network folder This does not appear if there is just one upper level B Displays folders one level above C Displays folders D Displays the print screen Change the print settings For more information see FILE PRINTING USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 924 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 925: ...image to the paper size when printing select the Fit To Page checkbox Tap the Start key to start file printing USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 925 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 926: ...laying the setting mode on the machine Displaying the setting mode Web version Displaying the setting mode on the machine Tap the Settings key Tap the Settings key on the home screen The setting mode screen appears on the touch panel Administrator password To maintain security the machine administrator should promptly change the password after the machine is purchased For the default administrator...

Page 927: ...chine print the IP address of the machine and enter the address on the PC s Web browser Tap the Settings key From the menu tap System Settings Print Data List To quit the setting mode tap the Exit key in the upper right corner of the screen For details on login procedures when user authentication is enabled see User authentication of the OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M46...

Page 928: ...r 6 0 or later Windows Netscape Navigator 9 Windows Firefox 2 0 or later Windows Safari 1 5 or later Macintosh Displaying the Setting mode Web version Depending on the machine settings user authentication may be required to display the setting mode Web version For password and other information required for user authentication contact the administrator of the machine USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465...

Page 929: ...ator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Status Machine Identification No Yes Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 929 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 930: ... Item Factory default setting U A Status Device status Yes Yes Network status Yes Yes Power reset No Yes Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 930 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 931: ...m Factory default setting U A Address Book Yes Yes Category Setting Category 1 Yes Yes Global Address Book No Yes Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 931 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 932: ...s File Batch Print Yes Yes Filing Data Backup No Yes Export Settings No Yes Import Settings No Yes Submit Print Job Yes Yes Print Settings Yes Yes This cannot be set on the machine Select Document Operations in Setting mode Web version Some items require administrative rights Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings USER S...

Page 933: ...in Name and Password No Yes Device Account Mode Setting Disabled No Yes Actions when the limit of pages for output jobs Job is Completed even w hen the Limit of Pages is Reached No Yes A Warning when Login Fails Disabled No Yes Disable Printing by Invalid User Disabled No Yes Automatically print stored jobs afte r login Disabled No Yes Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices...

Page 934: ...se Sensit ive Enable No Yes Edit help display of login screen No Yes User Information Print No Yes Release the Lock on Machine Oper ation Panel No Yes Reset Counter After Sending E mai l Status No Yes Organization Group List No Yes Page Limit Group List No Yes Machine Page Limit Setting No Yes Authority Group List No Yes Favorite Operation Group List 1 No Yes Customized Key List 1 No Yes USER S MA...

Page 935: ... Mode Disabled No Yes Card Type Card Reader Settings No Yes Card Type Card Reader No Yes Use IC Card for Authentication Disabled No Yes Card Reader Device Registration No Yes 1 This cannot be set on the machine Select User Control in Setting mode Web version USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 935 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 936: ...ecode Take Over Billing Code at Mode Transitio n Disable Disabling of Change of Billing Code Disable Apply Use Code While Logged in with De vice Account Disable Exception Setting for Billing Code Function Application Name registered as Stand ard Application All Invalid Web Browse Disable Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some set...

Page 937: ...splay Name Default Sub Code Display Name Default Displayed when the Web Browsing Expansion Kit is installed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 937 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 938: ...General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Default Settings Yes Yes Clock Adjust Yes Yes Specify Time Zone Yes Yes Date Time Settings Yes Yes Synchronize with Internet Time Server Disabled Yes Yes Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER ...

Page 939: ...ting List Yes Yes Printer Test Page Yes Yes Sending Address List Yes Yes Document Filing Folder List Yes Yes Paper Tray Settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Paper Tray Settings Yes Yes Auto Switching of Tray Enabled Yes Yes Tray 1 Plain Auto Inch Yes Yes Tray 2 Yes Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com p...

Page 940: ... When a large capacity tray is installed Paper Type Registration U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Paper Type Registration Yes Yes Fax Data Receive Forward U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Fax Data Receive Forward 1 2 Yes Yes Internet Fax Settings 1 Yes Yes Reception Start Yes Yes USER S MANUAL M...

Page 941: ...tings Yes Yes Copies 1 sets of copies Yes Yes Orientation Portrait Yes Yes Default Paper Size 8 1 2 x 11 A4 Yes Yes Default Output Tray Varies depending on the machine configuration Yes Yes Default Paper Type Plain Paper Yes Yes Initial Resolution Settings 600 dpi High Quality Yes Yes Disable Blank Page Print Disabled Yes Yes Line Thickness 5 Yes Yes 2 Sided Print 1 Sided Yes Yes N Up Print 1 Up Y...

Page 942: ...Feed Code 0 CR CR LF LF FF FF Yes Yes Wide A4 Disabled Yes Yes PostScript Settings Yes Yes Print PS Error Disabled Yes Yes Binary Processing Disabled Yes Yes 1 When a saddle finisher or finisher is installed 2 When a punch module is installed Document Filing Control U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Document Filing Control Yes Yes USER S MANUAL MX...

Page 943: ...isplay Mode Disabled No Yes Keys Touch Sound Middle No Yes Key Touch Sound at Initial Poi nt Disabled No Yes Auto Clear Setting 60 seconds No Yes Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disabled No Yes Message Time Setting 6 seconds No Yes MFP Display Language Setting American English No Yes Default Display Settings Home Screen No Yes Display Favorite Menus as Defaul Disabled No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465...

Page 944: ...etting 0 5 seconds No Yes Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disabled No Yes Disabling of Covers Inserts Mod e Disabled No Yes Set Keyboard Priority 1 External Keyboard 1 No Yes Display current path in System S ettings Enabled No Yes Enable link of current path Enabled No Yes Eco Recommendation Function Disabled No Yes Initial Original Count Setting All Invalid No Yes Unify 10 key number in ascendin g ...

Page 945: ...o Yes Remote Software Operation No Yes Operational Authority Prohibited No Yes View Password Entry Screen Display in Both PC and MFP No Yes Operation from Specified PC No Yes Operational Authority Prohibited No Yes Hostname or IP Address of P C No Yes View Password Entry Screen Display in Both PC and MFP No Yes Operation by User Who Has Password No Yes Operational Authority Prohibited No Yes USER ...

Page 946: ... be set in Setting mode Web version Device Control U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Device Control No Yes Original Size Detector Setting No Yes Original Detection Size Combinat ion Inch 1 No Yes Cancel Detection at Document G lass Disabled No Yes Disabling of Document Feeder Disabled No Yes Original Feeding Mode All Disabled No Yes Disabling of D...

Page 947: ...5 Disabled No Yes Auto Paper Selection Setting Plain Paper No Yes Tandem Connection Setting No Yes IP Address of Slave Machine 0 0 0 0 No Yes Port Number 50001 No Yes Tandem Mode No Yes Disabling of Master Machine M ode Disabled No Yes Disabling of Slave Machine Mo de Disabled No Yes Auto Switching of Finisher Tra ys 6 Enable No Yes Optimization of Hard Disk No Yes Fusing Cleaning Mode No Yes USER...

Page 948: ...nstalled 6 When a saddle finisher large stacker or finisher large stacker is installed Copy Function Settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Copy Function Settings No Yes Initial Status Settings No Yes Paper Tray Varies depending on the machine configuration No Yes Exposure Type Auto No Yes Copy Ratio 100 No Yes 2 Sided Copy 1 Side to 1 Side No...

Page 949: ...rgin Shift Setting No Yes Side 1 1 2 No Yes Side 2 1 2 No Yes Erase Width Adjustment No Yes Edge Clearance Width 1 2 No Yes Center Clearance Width 1 2 No Yes Initial Multi Shot Setting Disabled No Yes Layout Left to Right Right and Down No Yes Border No Print No Yes Card Shot Settings No Yes Original Size X 3 3 8 Y 2 1 8 No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa co...

Page 950: ...o Yes Disabling Registration of Custom Image Disabled No Yes Disabling sending while copying Disabled No Yes 600dpiX600dpi Scanning Mode fo r Document Feeder Disabled No Yes Quick Scan from Document Glas s Enabled No Yes Auto Clear Before Copy Job Disabled No Yes Auto Calibration Disabled No Yes 1 When a saddle finisher is installed Printer Settings U General user A System administrator Administra...

Page 951: ... Tray Settings No Yes Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray Disabled No Yes Enable Selected Paper Type i n Bypass Tray Enabled No Yes Exclude Bypass Tray from Au to Paper Select Disabled No Yes Job Spool Queuing Enabled No Yes Prohibit USB Memory Direct Prin t Disabled No Yes Disabling of Network Folder Dire ct Print Disabled No Yes Disabling sending while printing Disabled No Yes USER S MANUA...

Page 952: ...o Yes Image Send Settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Image Send Settings No Yes Operation Settings No Yes Default Settings No Yes Hold settings for a while after scanning has been completed Disabled No Yes Job Auto Start Time During S canning 60 seconds No Yes Default Display Settings E mail fax when fax is in No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N ...

Page 953: ...No Yes Initial Resolution Setting No Yes Scanner Common Apply the Resolution Set when Stored Disabled 2 00 X 200 dpi No Yes E mail Apply the Resolution Set when Stored Disabled 2 00 X 200 dpi No Yes Internet Fax 1 Apply the Resolution Set when Stored Disabled 2 00 X 100 dpi No Yes Fax 2 Apply the Resolution Set when Stored Disabled S tandard No Yes Default Exposure Settings Auto No Yes Default Ori...

Page 954: ...ed No Yes Default Verification Stamp 3 Disabled No Yes E mail Scanner Data Entry Disabled No Yes Fax Internet Fax Disabled No Yes Erase Width Adjustment No Yes Edge Clearance Width 1 2 No Yes Center Clearance Width 1 2 No Yes Time Specified Output of Rec eived Data Disabled No Yes Enable Disable Settings No Yes Settings to Disable Registration No Yes Disable Registering Destina All Invalid No Yes ...

Page 955: ...nner Tools 4 Disabled No Yes Disabling of Forwarding via Network Disabled No Yes Settings to Disable Transmission No Yes Disable Resend on Image Send Mode Disabled No Yes Disable Selection from Addr ess Book All Invalid No Yes Disable Direct Entry All Invalid No Yes Disable PC I Fax Transmis sion 1 Disabled No Yes Disable PC Fax Transmissi on Disabled No Yes Own Number and Name Set No Yes USER S M...

Page 956: ...e No Yes Disable Change of B W Setting in Auto Mode Disabled No Yes Common to E mails No item Auto No Yes No item Grayscale No Yes Disable Change of B W Setting in Auto Mode Disabled No Yes Initial File Format Setting Scanner Common No Yes File Type PDF No Yes Black White MMR G4 No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 95...

Page 957: ...ges 1 No Yes Compression Mode at Broadcasting No Yes Black White MH G3 No Yes Color Grayscale Middle No Yes Bk Letter Emphasis Disabled No Yes Maximum Size of E mail Attac hments E mail Unlimited No Yes If the E mail attachment s exceed maximum size it wil l be sent in multiple files Disabled No Yes Maximum Size of Data Attach ments FTP Desktop Network Unlimited No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M4...

Page 958: ...on Setting MH G3 No Yes Speaker Volume Setting No Yes Receive Signal Middle No Yes Communication Error Signal Middle No Yes Original Print on Transaction Report Print Out Error Report O nly No Yes Transaction Report Print Select Setting No Yes Single Sending Print Out Error Report O nly No Yes Broadcasting Print Out All Report No Yes Receiving Do not Print No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX...

Page 959: ...or 2 times No Yes Maximum Size of E mail Attac hments Unlimited No Yes Rotation Sending Setting All Enabled No Yes Printing Page Number at Rece iver Enabled No Yes Recall in Case of Line Busy Recall Times 2 Interval 3 minutes No Yes Recall in Case of Communicati on Error Recall Times 1 Interval 3 minutes No Yes Receive Settings No Yes Auto Receive Reduce Setting Enabled No Yes Duplex Reception Set...

Page 960: ...s depending on the machine configuration No Yes Number of Prints No Yes Staple Settings No Yes Allow Reject Mail or Domain Name Setting No Yes Allow Reject Mail or Domain Name Setting All Invalid No Yes 1 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed 2 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed 3 When the verification stamp unit is installed 4 When the network is enabled Document Filing Sett...

Page 961: ... Files No Yes Delete Now No Yes Delete Quick Files at Power U p Enabled No Yes Image Orientation Portrait No Yes Default Color Mode Settings Auto No Yes Default Exposure Settings Auto No Yes Default Original Image Type Text No Yes Initial Resolution Settings 600 X 600 dpi No Yes Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle No Yes Default Output Tray 1 Varies depending on the machine configuration No Yes USE...

Page 962: ...tings No Yes Original Size X 3 3 8 Y 2 1 8 No Yes Fit to Store Size Disabled No Yes Setting of store delete after file print Store No Yes Scan to External Memory Device Setting No Yes Default Color Mode Settings Auto No Yes Disable Change of B W Settin g in Auto Mode Disabled No Yes Initial File Format Setting No Yes File Type PDF No Yes Black White MMR G4 No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX...

Page 963: ...Default Setting of PDF Format for PC Browsing No Yes Black White No Yes Compression Mode MMR G4 No Yes Color Grayscale No Yes Compression Ratio Middle No Yes Copy Disabled No Yes Apply the resolution at job exe cution Disabled No Yes Resolution 200dpix200dpi No Yes Printer Disabled No Yes Apply the resolution at job exe cution Disabled No Yes Resolution 200dpix200dpi No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N ...

Page 964: ...job exe cution Disabled No Yes Resolution Standard No Yes Scan to HDD Disabled No Yes Apply the resolution at job exe cution Disabled No Yes Resolution 200dpix200dpi No Yes Document Output Options No Yes Print No Yes Copy Enabled No Yes Printer Enabled No Yes Scan Send Disabled No Yes Internet Fax Send Including P Disabled No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa ...

Page 965: ...ax 3 Disabled No Yes Scan to HDD Enabled No Yes Internet Fax Send 2 No Yes Copy Disabled No Yes Printer Disabled No Yes Scan Send Disabled No Yes Internet Fax Send Including P C I Fax Enabled No Yes Fax Send Including PC Fax Disabled No Yes Scan to HDD Disabled No Yes Fax Send 3 No Yes Copy Disabled No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads ...

Page 966: ...sion kit is installed List Print Administrator U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A List Print Administrator No Yes Administrator Settings List No Yes Image Sending Activity Report No Yes Data Receive Forward List No Yes Web Settings List 1 No Yes Metadata Set List 2 No Yes 1 When the network is enabled 2 When the application integration module is in...

Page 967: ...al driver No Yes Card Reader Writer Use internal driver No Yes USB Memory Use internal driver No Yes Level of Encryption None No Yes Job Priority Settings No Yes Enable Disable Settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A ENABLE DISABLE SETTINGS No Yes Printer Condition Settings No Yes Disable Blank Page Print Disabled No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N ...

Page 968: ...es Disabling of Covers Inserts Mod e Disabled No Yes Device Control No Yes Disabling of Document Feeder Disabled No Yes Disabling of Duplex Disabled No Yes Disabling of Large Capacity Cass ette 1 Disabled No Yes Disabling of Optional Paper Draw er 2 Disabled No Yes Disabling of Tray Setting Disabled No Yes Disabling of Finisher 3 Disabled No Yes Disabling of Offset Disabled No Yes USER S MANUAL MX...

Page 969: ...lectio n Disabled No Yes Disabling Registration of Custom Image Disabled No Yes Disabling sending while copying Disabled No Yes Printer Settings No Yes Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enabled No Yes Prohibit Test Page Printing Disabled No Yes Exclude Bypass Tray from Auto Paper Select Disabled No Yes Disabling of USB Memory Direct Print Disabled No Yes Disabling of Network Folder Dire ct Print Disab...

Page 970: ...l Invalid No Yes Disabling of Registration Dele tion of Program Disabled No Yes Disable Registration of Memor y Box All Invalid No Yes Disable Destination Registrati on Using Global Address Sear ch 5 All Invalid No Yes Disable Registration Using Net work Scanner Tools 5 Disabled No Yes Disabling of Forwarding via Ne twork Disabled No Yes Settings to Disable Transmission No Yes Disable Resend on Im...

Page 971: ... All Users is not allowed Enabled No Yes Selection of User Unknown i s not allowed Enabled No Yes Disable Storing to External Memory Device Disabled No Yes Web Browsing Settings 8 No Yes Disable URL Entry Disabled No Yes Disable Additional Edit of Favorit e Disabled No Yes Disable Registration Edit of Hom e Page Disabled No Yes Disable Print from Web Browse Mode Disabled No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M3...

Page 972: ...fax expansion kit is installed 7 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed 8 When the Web browsing expansion kit is installed Data Backup U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Data Backup No Yes Storage Backup No Yes Device Cloning No Yes Forward Address Book No Yes Product Key U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory defau...

Page 973: ...some settings depending on the peripheral devices installed Storing Calling of System Settings U General user A System administrator Administrator Item Factory default setting U A Storing Calling of System Settings No Yes Restore Factory Defaults No Yes Store Current Configuration No Yes Restore Configuration No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 ...

Page 974: ...ettings No Yes DNS Settings No Yes SMTP Settings No Yes LDAP Settings No Yes Public Folder NAS Settings No Yes General Settings No Yes General Settings No Yes Print Status on Startup Disabled No Yes Network Settings No Yes Reset the NIC No Yes Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565...

Page 975: ...tWare Settings No Yes NetWare Disabled No Yes Frame Type 802 2 No Yes Operation Mode PSERVER No Yes PSERVER Settings No Yes RPRINTER Settings No Yes EtherTalk No Yes EtherTalk Settings No Yes EtherTalk Disabled No Yes NetBIOS No Yes NetBIOS Settings No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 975 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 976: ...o Yes LPD No Yes LPD Settings No Yes LPD Enabled No Yes Timeout 0 seconds No Yes Use Banner Disabled No Yes RAW No Yes Raw Print Settings No Yes Raw Print Enabled No Yes Port Number 9100 No Yes Timeout 90 seconds No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 976 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 977: ...t No Yes Public Folder NAS Settings No Yes Public Use of Storage Allowed No Yes Shared Use of Storage Allowed No Yes faxreceive Use of Storage Allowed No Yes Proxy Settings No Yes Proxy Server Address No Yes User Name No Yes Password No Yes Port Number 8080 No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 977 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 ...

Page 978: ...Type Switching No Yes HTTP Access Settings No Yes Number of Users who can log in at the Same Time 32 No Yes Auto Logout Time 60 No Yes View Login User No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 978 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 979: ...k Scanner Settings Yes Yes Subject Name Settings Yes Yes File Name Settings Yes Yes Message Body Settings Yes Yes Administration Settings No Yes Advanced Settings No Yes Disable Selection of Reply to Disabled No Yes File Naming No Yes Default Subject Scanned image from Na No Yes Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings USE...

Page 980: ...er No Yes Port Number 110 No Yes POP Authentication Disabled No Yes User Name No Yes Password No Yes Change Password Disabled No Yes POP3 Communication Timeout 60 seconds No Yes Reception Check Interval Setting 5 minutes No Yes Enable SSL Disabled No Yes Connection Test No Yes Default Settings No Yes I Fax Own Name and Address Set No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica s...

Page 981: ...es Inbound Routing Settings No Yes Inbound Routing Disabled No Yes Disable Registration of Forwar d Table Disabled No Yes Disable Change Delete of For ward Table Disabled No Yes Disable Change of Forward Co ndition Disabled No Yes Print Style Setting Print at Error No Yes File Name Setting No Yes Preset of Character No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com por...

Page 982: ... Multi No Yes Forwarding Destination Settings Received Data No Yes Forward Send Data Disabled No Yes File Format TIFF Multi No Yes Metadata Setting No Yes Metadata Entry No Yes Metadata Delivery Disabled No Yes Metadata Set List No Yes External Applications Settings Standard Application Settings No Yes Received Application Settings No Yes External Accounting Application Settings No Yes USER S MANU...

Page 983: ...eb Browse Mod e Disabled No Yes Disable display of History Disabled No Yes Use a Proxy Server Disabled No Yes Always display Proxy Authenticatio n Dialogue Disabled No Yes USB Driver Settings No Yes External Keyboard Uses internal driver No Yes Card Reader Writer Uses internal driver No Yes USB Memory Uses internal driver No Yes Level of Encryption None No Yes E mail Print Settings No Yes USER S M...

Page 984: ...led No Yes Connection Test No Yes Setting for Print from the MFP FTP No Yes Setting for Print from the MFP SMB No Yes Setting for Print from the PC No Yes FTP Print Enabled No Yes Port Number 21 No Yes Use Banner Disabled No Yes When the Web browsing expansion kit is installed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 984 of 1441...

Page 985: ... Yes Eco Scan Setting Enabled No Yes Home Screen Disabled No Yes Copy Disabled No Yes Fax Image Send No Yes Scan Send Enabled No Yes Fax I Fax Send Enabled No Yes Fax Receive Internet Fax Recei ve Enabled No Yes Metadata Set Enabled No Yes Document Filing No Yes Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings USER S MANUAL MX M36...

Page 986: ...he Preheat mode Enabled No Yes Auto Power Shut Off Setting Fix transition time No Yes As soon as the remote job is finishe d enter Auto power shut off mode Disabled No Yes Change transition time by time of d ay No Yes Specific Date Operation Settings No Yes Display a Message to Delay the Tim e of Entry into Preheat Mode Aut o Power Shut Off Mode Disabled No Yes Toner Save Mode No Yes USER S MANUAL...

Page 987: ... Schedule Setting No Yes When the Web browsing expansion kit is installed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 987 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 988: ...inistrator Item Factory default setting U A E Mail Alert and Status E mail Status No Yes Alerts Message No Yes Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 988 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 989: ...inistrator Item Factory default setting U A Job Log Control Job Log No Yes View Job Log No Yes Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 989 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 990: ...abled No Yes Restrict Operation Force Retention No Yes Change Password No Yes Port Control No Yes Server Port No Yes HTTP Enabled No Yes Port Number 80 No Yes HTTPS Enabled No Yes Port Number 443 No Yes FTP Print Enabled No Yes Port Number 21 No Yes Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N M...

Page 991: ...o Yes Port Number 50001 No Yes PC Scan Enabled No Yes Port Number 52000 No Yes Remote Operation Panel Enabled No Yes Port Number 5900 No Yes SNMPD Enabled No Yes Port Number 161 No Yes Telnet Enabled No Yes NBT WINS Disabled No Yes JCP Disabled No Yes RARP Disabled No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 991 of 1441 3 17...

Page 992: ...lient Port No Yes HTTP Enabled No Yes HTTPS Enabled No Yes FTP Enabled No Yes FTPS Enabled No Yes SMTP Enabled No Yes SMTP SSL Enabled No Yes POP3 Enabled No Yes POP3 SSL Enabled No Yes SNMP TRAP Enabled No Yes Port Number 162 No Yes Notify Job End Enabled No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 992 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 1...

Page 993: ...Allowed No Yes Filter Addresses 1 to 4 No Yes Start IP Address 0 0 0 0 No Yes End IP Address 0 0 0 0 No Yes MAC Address Filter Settings No Yes Filter Addresses 1 to 10 000000000000 No Yes SSL Settings No Yes Server Port No Yes HTTPS Enabled No Yes IPP SSL Disabled No Yes Redirect HTTP to HTTPS in D Disabled No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 do...

Page 994: ...cation Disabled No Yes EAP Authentication Method EAP TLS No Yes EAP User Name No Yes Password No Yes Server Authentication Enabled No Yes EAP Timeout 10 seconds No Yes Number of EAP Retries 3 times No Yes Certificate Information No Yes Data Clearance Settings 1 Disabled No Yes Release Lock on File Folder Operatio No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portal...

Page 995: ... No Yes Default Settings Hidden Pattern Print Setting Standard No Yes Print Color Black No Yes Exposure Standard No Yes Font Size 48 points No Yes Angle 0 deg No Yes Font Style Standard No Yes Camouflage Pattern Pattern 1 No Yes Print Method Character stand out No Yes Print Contents Setting No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals M...

Page 996: ...Yes Black 5 No Yes Custom Text Registration No Yes Tracking Information Print No Yes Tracking Information Print Setting Disabled No Yes Print Information No Yes Unit Serial Number Enabled No Yes Text Disabled No Yes Account Job ID Enabled No Yes Login Name User Number Enabled No Yes Date Time Enabled No Yes Print Position No Yes USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa c...

Page 997: ...nt Filing Enabled No Yes Internet Fax Receive 2 Enabled No Yes Fax Receive 3 Enabled No Yes List Prints Enabled No Yes Initialize Private Data Data in Machine No Yes 1 Displayed when the data security kit is enabled 2 Displayed when the Internet fax function is enabled 3 Displayed when the fax function is enabled 4 Disabled when the data security kit is installed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX...

Page 998: ... in Machine Identification appears If no name has been set Not Set appears Current Status Displays the current status of the machine If two or more errors occur at the same time only one status is displayed accordi ng to the priority order The errors are displayed in the following priority order Printer error Account Limit Incorrect Paper Overdue Service Maintenance Paper Jam Marker Supply Missing...

Page 999: ...ine Reboot the MF P key Displays the restart screen Administrator rights are required Enter the Powe r Save Mode ke y Displays the power save mode screen Administrator rights are required Machine Identification Screen Item Description Name Enter the model name and other information of the machine Machine Code Enter the machine code of the machine Machine Location Enter the name of the place where ...

Page 1000: ...tus Displays the current status of the output tray installed in the machine Supply Status Displays the current status of supplies If staples are installed their status is displayed Device Configuration Displays the information of options installed in the machine HDD Status Displays the usage status of the hard disk drive USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com porta...

Page 1001: ...col IPv4 Settings Displays the IPv4 protocol settings DHCP BOOTP Selects whether or not the IP address is obtained from the DHCP BOOTP server RARP Displays the status of the RARP protocol IPv4 Address Displays the IPv4 address Subnet Mask Displays the current subnet mask Default Gateway Displays the current default gateway IPv6 Settings Displays the IPv6 status DHCPv6 Displays the status of the DH...

Page 1002: ... and then tappin g the Execute key again restarts the machine Enter the Power Save Mode Shifts the machine to power save mode Tap the Execute key to open the power save mode screen In some environments the machine cannot be restarted or shifted to power save mode USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1002 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 ...

Page 1003: ...se Delete the previously entered characters and enter a new name up to 127 characters The factory default name is Category 1 USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1003 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1004: ...ax Allow selection on operation panel Specify whether or not enable the global address to be selected on t he operation panel of the machine To Be Used as Default Specify whether or not to use the selected global address as default Authenticate a User in Glob al Address Search Select whether or not authenticate a user when a global address is s earched for USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N ...

Page 1005: ...e manipulated has a password enter the password in Password of File Item Description Display Style Saved files can be displayed in list format or thumbnail format Job Classification The saved files that are displayed can be filtered by job Display Items Set the number of files that are displayed Custom Folder The files that are in the Custom Folder can be displayed A specified file can be manipula...

Page 1006: ...e The files that were found can be displayed in list format or thumbnail f ormat Job Classification The found files can be filtered by job Display Items Set the number of files that are displayed File Batch Print Multiple files can be printed at once by batch printing Search for the files using search conditions and then select multiple files from the displayed search results If you want to use th...

Page 1007: ...nter the password that is set for the file 1 to 32 digits Search Result Job Classification The found files can be filtered by job Billing Code Main Code Select this checkbox and then enter the main code 32 characters or less Sub Code Select this checkbox and then enter the sub code 32 characters or less USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Man...

Page 1008: ... displayed Folder names can be filtered by index Display Items Set the number of files that are displayed Import Settings You can restore a file to the machine that was saved with Export Settings Enter a maximum of 200 characters for the path of the saved file in Import settings from file and click Execute USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads ...

Page 1009: ...then click Print Item Description Number of Prints Set the number of copies to be printed Paper Size Set the print size Orientation Select portrait or landscape for the print orientation 2 Sided Print Select one sided printing two sided printing booklet or two sided p rinting tablet Output If printing by set select the Print per Unit checkbox Staple Select staple settings Fit To Page Print with th...

Page 1010: ...d key the registration screen appears Up to 1000 groups can be registered For information on the settings see Settings Editing and deleting a user When you select a user from the list the user edit delete screen appears For information on the settings see Settings A user can be deleted using the Delete key The Vender and Vender2 options are displayed only when the vender is connected If the login ...

Page 1011: ...her User This is used when a print job is executed using invalid user information This cannot be selected from the login user screen For settings related to each of the users see the following table User Name Administrat or System Operator User Vender Vender2 Other User Login Nam e admin sysadmin users Vender Vender2 Other Password See Quic k Start Guid e 1 sysadmin 1 users 1 My Folder Main Folder...

Page 1012: ...he user name will appear in the user list Ente r a maximum of 10 characters for the initials The initials are optional Index Select a custom index to be stored The custom index names are the same as those used in the address book User Number 2 Enter a user number in 5 to 8 digits Login Name 1 Enter the login name that is used when authentication by login name and password is enabled up to 255 char...

Page 1013: ... Group Specify the page limit for the user by selecting one of the stored pag e limit groups The factory default setting is Unlimited For more information see PAGE LIMIT GROUP LIST Authority Group Specify the user authority by selecting one of the stored authority gr oups The factory default setting is User For more information see AUTHORITY GROUP LIST Favorite Operation Group The favorite operati...

Page 1014: ... the list to edit it Delete the previously entered characters and enter a new name up to 127 characters The factory default name is User 1 USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1014 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1015: ...tion is carried out in any mode except the job status screen Log in as an already registered user After logging in you can move freely through the modes The login screen appears when a document filing file is used or when a broadcast transmission is reattempted from the job status screen Authentication Method Setting This selects the authentication method When using user authentication be sure to ...

Page 1016: ... is enabled select Allow Login by Different User The login screen will vary depending on the authentication method that is selected For details see User authentication of the OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES When Authenticate a User by User Number Only is selected for the authentication method network authentication cannot be used If you have logged in as the Auto Login user and if you have failed a...

Page 1017: ...he following settings can be configured Job is Completed even when the Limit of Pages is Reached Job is Stopped when the Limit of Pages is Reached Job is Stopped when the Limit of Pages is Reached and the Receiving Job is Deleted USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1017 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1018: ...s a password The number of failed login attempts is retained even if the power is turned off Locking of the operation panel for five minutes can be canceled by selecting User Control in Setting mode Default Settings Release the Lock on Machine Operation Panel USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1018 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 A...

Page 1019: ...n an FTP server in Setting mode Web version can be prohibited When a print job is executed by a user who is not registered in the machine the Other User registered as factory default is used as the login user For more information see Users stored as factory default USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1019 of 1441 3 17 2016 ...

Page 1020: ... and print data has been spooled to the machine you can have the spooled print data automatically print out when the user who enabled retention logs in USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1020 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1021: ... This setting is used to select one of the LDAP servers registered in the machine as the authentication server When login is performed by network authentication using user information that is not registered in the machine the login user will be the User registered as factory default For more information see Users stored as factory default USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica ...

Page 1022: ...perties associated with Pages Limit Group Authority Group Favorite Operation Group and My Folder to the directory information of the LDAP server used for user authentication The property information is indicated below Settings previously stored in the machine cannot be changed Property Name of property in facto ry default state Setting Pages Limit Group pagelimit Registration number of Pages Limit...

Page 1023: ...ed the same authority and settings on any machine register the Pages Limit Group Authority Group and Favorite Operation Group information with the same authority so that they will be registered in each machine using the same registration numbers For My Folder register the folder having the same name in Custom Folder in each machine The directory information of the LDAP server that is used cannot b...

Page 1024: ...egistered will appear and login will not be possible In this case the user name stored on the LDAP server or the user name stored on the machine must be changed Consult the administrator of the machine If automatic registration by LDAP authentication is attempted when 1000 users are already registered the following message will appear and login will not be possible Maximum entries for User Name is...

Page 1025: ...r If the access control obtained from the LDAP server is not registered in the machine the factory default user authority will be applied When this function is not enabled and a user is authenticated by network authentication as a non registered user the factory default user authority will be applied USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manual...

Page 1026: ...tion is enabled this setting specifies whether or not to display the page counts of a user when the user logs in USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1026 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1027: ...s shown or asterisks are shown Item Description Display login name Show the login name Display login name with Hide the login name with asterisks USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1027 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1028: ...authentication is enabled this setting specifies whether or not to include the job status in user authentication USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1028 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1029: ...pecifies whether or not to enable automatic logout The time until logout can be specified up to 240 seconds in increments of 10 seconds USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1029 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1030: ...nt users If the checkbox is set to case sensitivity for login names is disabled Therefore identically spelled user names with upper and lower case character differences will be authenticated as the user name of the same user If the selected checkbox is changed to and identical user names with only upper and lower case character differences exist the user names that have already been registered are...

Page 1031: ...F LOGIN SCREEN Settings you have created here is displayed on the login screen USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1031 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1032: ... no groups are stored To specify One Sided or Two Sided printing in List Print select Setting mode System Settings Device Control List Prints In All User Information Print the following items are handled by 2 sided printing on an item basis User List List of Number of Pages Used Page Limit Group List Favorite Operation Group List USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa ...

Page 1033: ...FTER E MAIL STATUS TRANSFER After E mail Status has been sent the counter is reset USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1033 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1034: ...IST This is used to store user groups Tap each group name to enter them directly USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1034 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1035: ...een for that group For information on the settings see Settings To return a group to the factory default state set Select the Group Name to be the Registration Model to Unlimited on the edit screen Settings Item Description Group Name Store the name of the group up to 32 characters Select the Home Screen to be the Registration Model Select one of the previously stored groups for use as a template ...

Page 1036: ...e numb er of pages that can be input output in that mode When Limited is selected enter a page limit 1 to 99999999 pages USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1036 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1037: ...Limit When Prohibited is selected for a mode input from the mode is prohi bited When Unlimited is selected for a mode there is no limit to the numb er of pages that can be input output in that mode When Limited is selected enter a page limit 1 to 99999999 pages USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1037 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14...

Page 1038: ...gs and factory default settings of template groups To return a group to the factory default state select the group from the list and select any of options Return to the Administrator Authority Return to the system administrator authority Return to the User Authority Return to the Guest Authority Return to the color prohibited authority and Return to the scanner prohibited authority Tapping the Exe...

Page 1039: ... Prohibited Allowed USB Memory Direct Print Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Allowed Network Folder Pull Print Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Allowed Sending while printing Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Toner Save Mode Usage Approval Setting No Toner S aving No Toner S aving No Toner S aving No Toner S aving No Toner S ave PDF Creation for PC Bro wsing Allowed Prohibited Allo...

Page 1040: ...a Global Address Book All allowed All allowed All allowed All allowed All allowed Document Filing Scan to HDD Approval Setting Allowed Prohibited Allowed Only Black White Allo wed Allowed Special Modes Usage Allowed Prohibited Allowed Prohibited Allowed PDF Creation for PC Bro wsing Allowed Prohibited Allowed Allowed Allowed Scan to Ext Memory Dev Approval Setting Allowed Prohibited Allowed Allowe...

Page 1041: ...ted Allowed Allowed Allowed Common Functions Approval Settings for 2 Si ded Print All allowed All allowed All allowed All allowed All allowed Changing Billing Code Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Output Approval Settings All allowed All prohibite d All allowed All prohibite d All allowed Security Print Jobs Other than Pri nt Hold Job Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed File Saving Quic...

Page 1042: ...tration of Pre set T ext Forward Table Allowed Allowed E MAIL ALERT AND STA TUS Prohibited Prohibited Job Log Setting Prohibited Prohibited Port Control Filter Settin gs Prohibited Prohibited Custom Link Setting Prohibited Prohibited Operation Manual Downlo ad Allowed Allowed 1 For information on each setting see the setting mode list 2 All allowed except for Change Administrator Password Dependin...

Page 1043: ...settings for Paper Tray Exposure Type Copy Ratio 2 Sid ed Output Offset Output Tray Staple Position and Punch Image Send Initial Status Settings Select settings for Image Orientation Exposure Resolution Color Mode File Format and Original Image Type Select settings for Sp ecified Pages per File and Fax Sender Name Document Filing Image Orientation Specify the image orientation Initial Status Setti...

Page 1044: ...tern used in the touch panel Automatically print stored jobs aft er login When retention is enabled in the printer driver and print data has b een spooled to the machine the spooled print data is automaticall y printed out when the user who enabled retention logs in Customize Key Setting Select to use System Settings or use the registered customized key settings for performing Customize Key Settin...

Page 1045: ...each mode Settings Item Description Key Name Enter a name for the customized key maximum of 20 characters Function Menu Program Ot hers Select the function that you wish to assign to the key The functions that can be selected vary by mode Hide If this item is enabled the customized keys are not displayed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Ma...

Page 1046: ...ayout of the Screen The layout of the keys in the home screen is displayed Home button Registers the function to use for the selected key number Fixed button Registers the function to use for the selected key number This butto n is displayed on all pages of the home screen Template Select a layout pattern of the registered key Rename Home Screen Enter a home screen name to change the existing name...

Page 1047: ...n you select a user and tap the Show key this user count is displayed Item Description Next Displays the next user in the order of the registration numbers Previous Displays the previous user in the order of the registration numbers Show Counts Displays the counts and the number of pages remaining of the select ed user for each function Page Limit The page limit set for the user appears in parenth...

Page 1048: ...ion Clear Count Reset the count of the selected item to 0 Clear All Count Clears all counts of the selected user to zero 0 When multiple users are selected Item Description Show Counts Displays the counts and the number of pages remaining of the select ed user for each function Clear Count Reset the count of the selected item to 0 Clear All Count Clears all counts of the selected user to zero 0 Sa...

Page 1049: ...not be set on the machine It can be set in Setting mode Web version USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1049 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1050: ... configuration file If y ou tap the Clear key all files that match the current search con ditions are deleted Check Facility Code in HID Mode Checks the facility code of a HID card Facility Code Enters the facility code of a HID card When you tap the Store k ey the facility code is stored USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M...

Page 1051: ...hentication and for use of a HID or othe r IC card Card Reader Device Registration In this setting the product ID and vender ID of the connected HID card reader are displayed To store the HID card reader touch the Read key For settings that enable an HID card to be used consult your service technician USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manua...

Page 1052: ...g has been completed tap the Submit and Register Next key you can continuously register the next main code To end the registration process tap the Submit key Correct a main code Selecting a main code from the list displays the window to correct the main code For information on setting items refer to List of setting items After the setting has been completed tap the Submit key you can apply the cor...

Page 1053: ...lic destination select Public to All When specifying a public destination select Designate Public Add ress then specify a group to share the billing code To register a group for specifying a public destination Select Setting Mode Administrator User Control Organization Group List USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1053 of ...

Page 1054: ... setting has been completed tap the Submit and Register Next key you can continuously register the next sub code To end the registration process tap the Submit key Correct a sub code Selecting a sub code from the list displays the window to correct the sub code For information on setting items refer to List of setting items After the setting has been completed tap the Submit key you can apply the ...

Page 1055: ...ion select Public to All When specifying a public destination select Designate Public Add ress then specify a group to share the billing code To register a group for specifying a public destination Select Setting Mode Administrator User Control Organization Group List USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1055 of 1441 3 17 20...

Page 1056: ...ing code in the billing code entry window Apply Use Code While Logged in with Device Account If this function is enabled a use code is always set while you are logging in with device account Exception Setting for Billing Code Function The billing code entry window is displayed when the external application that is set to enable is started The setting items are as follows Application Name registere...

Page 1057: ...code selection window USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1057 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1058: ...hine specifications and peripheral devices installed Before printing the number of pages used select Setting mode System Settings Device Control List Prints In All Sending Address List the following items are handled by 2 sided printing on an item basis Individual List Group List USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1058 of ...

Page 1059: ...your region is Japan 9 hours 00 minutes Date Time Settings Select and set the year month day hour and minute Synchronize with Internet Ti me Server This can be used when the machine is connected to the Internet Th e machine s time is automatically adjusted to the time of an Internet ti me server If System Settings in Setting mode Operation Settings Disabling of Clock Adjustment is enabled the date...

Page 1060: ...ou selected Day of the Week in Select Setting Type set the st arting week of daylight saving time and then the starting day If you se lected Date in Select Setting Type set the starting date Set th e hour and minute and the UTC Coordinated Universal Time setting Completing Time Set the ending time of daylight saving time in the same way as you se t the starting time Adjustment Time Set the time to...

Page 1061: ...a blank space for the separator used i n the date Day Name Position Select whether the day name appears before or after the date Time Display Select 12 hour format or 24 hour format for the time 12 Hour Display 00 00 AM to 11 59 AM 00 00 PM to 11 59 PM 24 Hour Display 00 00 to 23 59 If System Settings in Setting mode Operation Settings Disabling of Clock Adjustment is enabled the date and time can...

Page 1062: ...entry screens can be changed The keyboard layouts that can be selected are shown below English US English UK Japanese French German Swedish Norwegian Finnish Danish Russian Greek Turkish USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1062 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1063: ...red in the machine Individual List Group List Program List Memory Box List All Sending Address List Document Filing Folder List This shows the folder names for document filing To specify 1 Sided or 2 Sided Print select Setting mode administrator System Settings Device Control List Prints The items that appear will vary depending on the functions that have been added to the machine You cannot print...

Page 1064: ...vary by paper tray For more inf ormation see Tray Settings To user type setup see PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION Size Select the paper size from the list The paper sizes that can be selec ted vary by tray The sizes that can be selected may also be restricte d by the paper type selected above For more information see Tray Settings If the desired size does not appear in the list select Custom Size a nd dir...

Page 1065: ... Letter Head Pre Punched Color User Type 8 1 2 x11 A4 Tray 4 when a stand 500 2000 sheet pa per drawer is installe Plain Pre Printed Rec ycled Letter Head Pre Punched Color User 8 1 2 x11 A4 If the paper size specified here is different from the size of paper that is loaded into a tray a problem or misfeed may occur when printing To change the paper size in a tray see BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Pape...

Page 1066: ...sparency Auto Inch 8 1 2 x11 8 1 2 x11 R Auto AB A4 A4R Tab Paper Auto Inch 8 1 2 x11 Auto AB A4 Envelope Com 10 Monarch DL C5 form 3 form 4 internati onal form 2 international form 4 square form 2 squ are form 3 Heavy paper 1 28 lbs bond to 110 lbs index 106 g m2 to 220 g m2 heavy paper Heavy paper 2 110 lbs bond to 140 lbs index 221 g m2 to 256 g m2 heavy paper Heavy paper 3 140 lbs index to 110...

Page 1067: ...ings is placed in the bypass tray the size that is selected in the settings will be automatically detected Auto Inch 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 2 5 216 mm x 340 mm Auto AB 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x 13 216 mm x 340 mm 8 1 2 x 13 2 5 216 mm x 343 mm 8 1 2 x 13 1 2 USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1067 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1068: ...rs Select whether you wish to enter the size in mm Size Input AB or inches Size Input Inch and then set the X and Y dimensions of the paper Size Input Inch The X direction can be set between 5 1 2 and 17 The factory default setting is 17 The Y direction can be set between 3 5 8 and 11 5 8 The factory default setting is 11 Size Input AB The X direction can be set between 140 mm and 432 mm The facto...

Page 1069: ...a front and reverse side is used Disable Duplex Use this setting when paper loaded cannot be used for 2 sided pri nting Disable Reverse Use this setting when using paper that cannot be reversed Disable Staple Use this setting when paper used cannot be stapled Disable Punch Use this setting when paper used cannot be punched The settings that can be selected vary depending on the peripheral devices ...

Page 1070: ...of toner received faxes can be forwarded to another Internet fax machine To cancel forwarding Tap the job status display and cancel fax forwarding in the similar way as for a transmission job Forwarding is not possible if no faxes were received or a forwarding fax number is not programmed For an explanation of settings related to the fax function see FAX DATA RECEIVE FORWARD FAX FUNCTIONS To enabl...

Page 1071: ...inted only those pages that were not printed will be forwarded If you select System Settings in Setting mode Image Send Settings Operation Settings Default Settings and if Hold Setting for Received Data Print is enabled you are prompted to enter a password Enter the correct password using numeric keys USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manua...

Page 1072: ...340 mm 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x 13 216 mm x 343 mm 8 1 2 x 13 1 2 8 1 2 x 11 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A3W A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 12 x 18 11 x 17 8K 16K Default Output Tray Center Tray Not displayed if a finisher is installed Offset Tray 1 Finisher Upper Tray 2 Finisher Lower Tray 2 Right Tray Default Paper Type Plain Paper Letter Head Pre Printed Pre Punched Recycle Paper Color Initial Resolution Setti...

Page 1073: ...all lines are printed at a width of 1 dot Paper sizes that can be used with this function are 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 A3 B4 and A4 This function may not take effect with some print methods Can be selected when 2 Up is selected Can be selected when 4 Up 8 Up is selected Only effective when printing PDF JPEG and TIFF files When a punch module is installed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M56...

Page 1074: ... PCL Lin e Feed Code This setting is used to select how the printer responds wh en a line feed command is received 0 CR CR LF LF FF FF 1 CR CR LF LF LF FF FF 2 CR CR LF CR LF FF CR FF 3 CR CR LF LF CR LF FF CR FF Wide A4 When this is enabled 80 characters per line are printed on the 8 1 2 x 11 A4 size paper using a 10 pitch font When this setting is disabled up to 78 characters are print ed per li...

Page 1075: ... Item Description Setting Print PS Error When a PS PostScript error occurs during PostScript printing this setting determines whether or not an error notice is printed Enabled Disabled Binary Pr ocessing Receive PostScript data in binary format Enabled Disabled USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1075 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14...

Page 1076: ...s can be registered For information on the settings see Settings Editing and deleting a custom folder A custom folder can be selected from the list to open an edit delete screen for the custom folder For information on the settings see Settings Delete the folder using the Delete key Settings Item Description Folder Name Enter a name maximum of 28 characters for the custom folder to be created A na...

Page 1077: ...ts Select User Name Select the desired user name from the user list If the folder has a password the correct password must be entered before a file can be deleted A folder that contains files cannot be deleted Either move the files to a different folder or delete them before deleting the folder USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M...

Page 1078: ...B devices to the machine The connection of a USB device that is not compatible with the machine will not appear USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1078 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1079: ...screen in base screen of fax Internet fax and netw ork scanner modes Exposure adjustment screen for Scan to HDD in document filing mode Key Touch Sound at Initial Point When you specify the exposure in the exposure adjustment screen of each mode a bleep sounds three times when the reference value is reached Auto Clear Setting The time until Auto Clear activates can be set to any number of seconds ...

Page 1080: ... Set the screen that appears after auto clear and login You can select from Copy E mail Network Folder FTP Desktop Internet Fax Fax Data Entry Address Book Document Filing Home Screen or the Sharp OSA Screen Display Favorite Menus as Default You can specify to display the Favorite first during mode selection Display Action Panel as default When user authentication is enabled and a display language...

Page 1081: ...er ran out during the job Key Operation Setting Time for Accepting Key Entry This setting determines how long a key in the touch panel must be tapped until the key input is registered The time can be set from 0 to 2 seconds in increments of 0 5 seconds By lengthening the time setting key input can be prevented when a key is tapped accidentally Keep in mind however that when a longer setting is sel...

Page 1082: ...e the Setting mode of the machine is in use the menu position is displayed in hierarchical form at the top of the touch panel Enable link of current path If Display current path in System Settings is turned ON the link of the current path is enabled Eco Recommendation Function Shows recommended copy print settings for copy document filing reprint and direct print Display the copy print settings sc...

Page 1083: ...from the left top position MFP Display Pattern Setting Select a color pattern in the touch panel from seven color patterns A sample of the selected template can be reviewed Preview Setting Received Data Image Check Setting Select whether or not a preview of received faxes and Internet faxes is shown This is displayed when a facsimile expansion kit or Internet fax expansion kit is installed USER S ...

Page 1084: ...Password Entry Screen When remote software is used to operate the machine remotely you can have a password entry screen appear on the machine on the PC or both Operation from Specified PC Operation Authority This is used to allow remote operation of the machine using the specified PC Host Name or IP Address of PC Enter the host name or IP address of the PC to be connected to the machine Enter a ma...

Page 1085: ...e PC or both Cookie Setting Specify whether or not to save or delete cookies to be used when using Sharp OSA or viewing Web pages If Not hold Cookie is selected received cookies are discarded when operations have ended USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1085 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1086: ...that you frequently use when entering an address or domain name in advance Enter a maximum of 16 characters USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1086 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1087: ...um of 20 characters Item Select the function that you wish to assign to the key The functions that can be selected vary by mode Return to the Defaults The selected favorite settings are returned to the factory default It can be configured in Setting mode Web version only It cannot be configured in the touch panel of the machine USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa co...

Page 1088: ...ys Select the modes shown in the mode selection keys Display mode keys in home screen Set whether the modes selection keys are shown in the home scree n When this is disabled the mode selection keys do not appear in the home screen even when Display mode keys in screen is enabled USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1088 of ...

Page 1089: ...rs Template Select one of six patterns The key layout of the pattern selected wit h the Key Layout of the Screen is displayed Use Custom Image Set the background image that select your favorite image File or Folder Name Select the file or folder that want to register the background image Image Item Description Background Image Displays the selected background image file name You can change th e im...

Page 1090: ...A4 Inch 3 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 13 2 5 216 mm x 34 0 mm 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 11 x17 8 1 2 x13 2 5 216 mm x 340 m m 8 1 2 x11 8 1 2 x11 R 5 1 2 x8 1 2 A3 A4 AB 1 A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R AB 2 A3 A4 A4R A5 B5 B5R 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x 13 A3 A4 A4R A5 B4 B5 B5R 11 x17 8 1 2 x11 216 mm x 330 mm 8 1 2 x13 AB 3 A4 A4R A5 B4 8K 16K 16KR A3 A...

Page 1091: ...et to operate by default in copy image send scan to HDD and saved in external memory device modes When a mode is frequently used this saves you from having to select the mode in another mode each time you need to use it Mixed Size Original Same Width Copy mode only Different Width Slow Scan Mode Blank Page Skip Excluding fax mode and Internet fax mode Disabling of Duplex This is used to disable 2 ...

Page 1092: ...fset Disabling of Stapler This setting is used to prohibit the use of staple such as when the staple of finisher or saddle finisher malfunctions Saddle Stitch Position Adjust This setting is used to adjust the staple position saddle fold position when a saddle finisher is installed and the saddle stitch function is used The value can be adjusted in increments of 0 2 mm within a range of 5 0 mm fro...

Page 1093: ...an the paper types specified with this setting The paper type set for each paper tray by selecting System Settings in Setting mode Paper Tray Settings Tandem Connection Setting When two machines are used as network printers using TCP IP protocol use this setting to configure the port number and IP address of the machine used as the tandem slave machine Disabling of Master Machine Mode To prohibit ...

Page 1094: ...urning off the power with the main power switch of the machine Auto Power Shut Off When optimization is completed the machine will automatically restart Fusing Cleaning Mode To use the tandem function when user authentication is enabled the same login name and password must be used on both the master machine and slave machine If the same login name and password are not used the page count may not ...

Page 1095: ...ecify to use the black streak reduction or not The black streak reduction can be used for Scan Original Copy Image Send and Scan to HDD functions If the black streak reduction is enabled select any of the following options Process Black Thin Streaks If improvement is not noticed after the first time you use the function try executing the function again Be sure to use only paper that is in the same...

Page 1096: ...for black streaks detection Set this option to display a warning message when black streaks are detected by the document feeder USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1096 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1097: ...mode settings Copy Ratio Specify the copy ratio that is selected by default 2 Sided Copy Configure the 2 sided mode settings that are selected by default If this setting is used to change the default setting for the duplex fun ction to any setting other than 1 Side to 1 Side and the duplex fu nction or automatic document feeder fails or is disabled the setting w ill revert to 1 Side to 1 Side Outp...

Page 1098: ...to enable correct copying on the paper Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios Add two enlargement preset ratio values 101 to 400 and two reduction preset ratio values 25 to 99 Also you can change the preset ratio if necessary Setting a Maximum Number of Copies This is used to set the maximum number that can be entered for the number of copies number of continuous copies Any number from 1 to 999 can be ...

Page 1099: ...otted lines Card Shot Settings This is used to set the default original size for the card shot function Specify a value from 1 25 mm to 8 1 2 216 mm in increments of 1 8 3 mm for both the X horizontal and Y vertical dimensions of the original Fit to Page Enable this setting to have the Fit to Page key always appear in the card shot screen Automatic Saddle Stitch Saddle stitch stapling take place a...

Page 1100: ...ibited is often used it is recommended that you enable this setting Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disables the Auto Paper Selection function When this setting is enabled automatic selection of paper that is the same size as the original on the document glass or in the automatic document feeder does not take place Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is Supplied the Paper When this setting is en...

Page 1101: ...y image is not as clear Auto Clear Before Copy Job Enables the Auto Clear function during copy even when a copy job is not completed This protects the machine from being held due to the incomplete copy job When high quality mode is not selected the following conditions must be satisfied in order to scan at 600 x 300 dpi and attain the fastest speed The copy ratio must be set to 100 Do not select a...

Page 1102: ...message appears prompting you to begin automatic calibration Place the test patch on the document glass as shown below so that the thin line at the edge of the page is to the left Lay copy paper about five sheets that is the same size as the test patch on top of the placed test patch gently close the automatic document feeder and tap the Execute key If the black is still off after performing Auto ...

Page 1103: ...allows A4 size paper to be used if 8 1 2 x 11 size paper is not loaded Print Density Level This lightens or darkens the print density The print density can be adjusted to five levels Bypass Tray Settings Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray This is used to prohibit printing when the paper size specified for a print job is different from the paper size inserted in the bypass tray Enable Select...

Page 1104: ...obs that have not yet been analyzed appear in the spool queue When this function is disabled received print jobs are displayed in the job queue instead of being displayed in the spool queue However when an encrypted PDF job is printed the job appears in the spool queue Prohibit USB Memory Direct Print Disables the function for directly printing of a file in a USB memory device Disabling of Network...

Page 1105: ...ecimal dump I O Timeout The I O timeout can be set to any number of seconds from 1 to 999 The I O timeout function temporarily breaks the connection if the set duration of time elapses without any data being received by the port After the connection is broken the port is set to auto selection or the next print job is begun Enable USB Port Enables printing from the USB port USB Port Emulation Switc...

Page 1106: ... at End of Job The port changes to auto selection when printing ends The settings are the same as those of Network Port Emulation Switching Unless printer errors occur frequently it is recommended that you use the factory default setting Auto The settings are the same as those of USB Port Emulation Switching Unless printer errors occur frequently it is recommended that you use the factory default ...

Page 1107: ...pses the port changes to Auto Selection The following two print ports are available on the machine USB port Network port USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1107 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1108: ...on Place the test patch on the document glass as shown below so that the thin line at the edge of the page is to the left Lay copy paper about five sheets that is the same size as the test patch on top of the placed test patch gently close the automatic document feeder and tap the Execute key If the black is still off after performing Auto Calibration repeating Auto Calibration once again may impr...

Page 1109: ... the following 5 base screens that appear when you tap the Image Send key or when you tap the CA key on the Image Send Mode screen E mail Network Folder FTP Desktop Internet Fax Fax Data Entry Apply Addresses of Sending Modes Only When an address is selected from the address book only the addresses displayed in narrowing mode are applied Higher priority is given to the display of address book If i...

Page 1110: ...X 200 dpi 300 X 300 dpi 400 X 400 dpi 600 X 600 dpi E mail 100 X 100 dpi 150 X 150 dpi 200 X 200 dpi 300 X 300 dpi 400 X 400 dpi 600 X 600 dpi Internet Fax 200 X 100 dpi 200 X 200 dpi 200 X 400 dpi 400 X 400 dpi 600 X 600 dpi Fax Normal and small characters Fine Ultra Fine Half Tone Apply the Resolution Set when Stored When an image stored by document filing is used this applies the resolution set...

Page 1111: ...f 5 levels Contrast This is used to adjust the contrast of image for scanning a document in image send mode It can be set to any of 5 levels Sending the same image sent in Fax I Fax mode This is used to enable or disable the default setting Enable this function to send the same image simultaneously using fax mode or Internet fax mode with another mode If this function is disabled an image specifie...

Page 1112: ... faxes can be printed by entering a password factory default setting 0000 with the numeric keys Password When Hold Setting for Received Data Print is enabled enter the password 4 digit number Default Verification Stamp This is used to enable or disable the default setting Enable this to always affix the verification stamp on the original that has already been scanned using the automatic document f...

Page 1113: ...ited Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel Disables address control from the machine Configure the setting for each of the following items Group Direct Entry Group Address Book Contacts Select All Selects all items Clear Checked Clears all selections Disable Registering Destination on Web Page Disables to store the destination from Setting mode Web version Configure the setting for ...

Page 1114: ...Tools Use this option to suppress to store data of another machine through Inbound Routing of address book Disabling of Forwarding via Network This prohibits inbound routing Settings to Disable Transmission These settings are used to disable the following transmission operations Disable Resend on Image Send Mode This setting disables the Resend key in the base screen of image send mode Disable Sel...

Page 1115: ...mation Sender Data Registration Use this to store the sender name for fax and Internet fax the sender fax number and the sender address for Internet fax The stored sender name and sender fax number or Internet sender address will be printed at the top of the received fax Sender Name Enter the sender name A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the sender name Sender Fax Number Sets the sende...

Page 1116: ...acters can be stored After entering a sender name tap the Store key The lowest unused registration number from 01 to 18 will be automatically assigned to the sender name This number cannot be changed Sender Name List Displays a list of stored sender names When you select a sender name it is deleted USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals ...

Page 1117: ...ify Scanner Common unless E mail is specified Auto Mono2 Grayscale Full Color Grayscale Mono 2 When scanning a black and white original with the color mode set to Auto Disable Change of B W Setting in Auto Mode Disables black white settings from the base screen when the color mode is set to Auto Initial File Format Setting Specify the initial file format for sending a file in E mail Network Folder...

Page 1118: ... separate file for each scanned page when multiple pages are scanned If this setting is enabled a number of pages per file can be specified Number of Pages Any number of pages can be specified as the number of pages per file This setting can be used if Specified Pages per File is enabled Compression Mode at Broadcasting Selects the compression mode for broadcasting using Scan to E mail or Internet...

Page 1119: ...mits that can be selected are 50 MB 150 MB and 300 MB If the total size of the image files created by scanning the original exceeds the limit the image files are discarded If you do not wish to set a limit select Unlimited Bcc Setting Enable Bcc Enable this setting if you wish to use Bcc delivery Displays the Bcc key on the image send address book screen Display Bcc Address on the Job Status Scree...

Page 1120: ... address of the login user is set as the default address Select the following items based on your intended use Item Description Apply also for Fax I Fax Screen In the fax I Fax screen if you do not want to apply the E mail ad dress of the login user as the default destination tap the Apply al so for Fax I Fax Screen checkbox to set to Allow Cancel You can cancel the E mail address of the login use...

Page 1121: ...MR G4 Speaker Volume Setting Adjusts the volume of fax receive signals and communication error signals heard through the speaker A fax receive signal sounds after the machine checks the mail server and retrieves received faxes A communication error signal sounds when a delivery failed e mail is received from the destination Internet fax machine Original Print on Transaction Report When a transacti...

Page 1122: ...l Report Print Out Error Report Only Do not Print Receiving Print Out All Report Print Out Error Report Only Do not Print When a transaction report is printed this is used to print part of the first page of the transmitted original on the transaction report For details see Original Print on Transaction Report Activity Report Print Select Setting Prints the Image Sending Activity Report stored in t...

Page 1123: ...ts of 1 minute Number of Resend Times at Reception Error The number of resend attempts when an error message is received from an I Fax recipient can be set to any number from 0 to 15 If you only select the Print Daily at Designated Time setting and the number of recorded transactions reaches 200 before the specified time each new transaction will delete the oldest transaction the oldest transactio...

Page 1124: ...P transmission This setting sets the number of recall attempts and the interval between recall attempts when a transmission is not successful due to the line being busy or other reason Number of Times to Recall When Line is Busy Specifies whether or not recalling is performed when the line is busy During recalling you can set the number of recall attempts Any number from 0 to 15 can be selected In...

Page 1125: ...omatically reduce the image to fit the standard size Duplex Reception Setting This is used to have received faxes printed on both sides of the paper When this setting is enabled and a fax consisting of 2 or more pages is received the pages must be the same size the pages are printed on both sides of the paper Set Address for Data Forwarding When the machine cannot print a received fax the fax can ...

Page 1126: ... image When Outside the Received Image is selected the received image is reduced and the date and time of reception is printed in the blank area that results A3 RX Reduce When an A3 size fax is received this function reduces the fax to ledger 11 x 17 size POP3 Communication Timeout Setting The duration of time the machine waits until stopping reception can be set from 30 to 300 seconds in incremen...

Page 1127: ... of whet her or not any addresses or domains have been stored Add New Adds a new address or domain maximum of 50 from which reception is to be rejected or allowed Enter the address domain maximum of 64 characters and tap the S tore key If the first character of the entry is not the entry is identified as an address If the first character is the entry is identified as a do main xxx xx xxx com is tr...

Page 1128: ...tored anti junk mail addresses or domains only the Add New key can be selected USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1128 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1129: ...te Administrator Authority Setting For files and user folders that have a password this setting allows the administrator password to be entered instead of the password when accessing the file or folder Also you can change the preset ratio if necessary Delete All Quick Files Deletes all files from the Quick File folder except for protected files Delete Now Tap this key to start deletion of all file...

Page 1130: ...ct the original type beforehand to enable scanning at a resolution suitable for the original The following settings can be configured Text Printed Photo Text Photo Text Photo Printed Photo Map Initial Resolution Settings One of the following resolutions can be selected for the default resolution for transmission 100 X 100 dpi 150 X 150 dpi 200 X 200 dpi 300 X 300 dpi 400 X 400 dpi When the exposur...

Page 1131: ...All Users key and the User Unknown key in the user selection screen Erase Width Adjustment Sets the default erase width for erase function Specify a value from 0 0 mm to 1 25 mm in increments of 1 8 3 mm for both edge erase and center erase Card Shot Settings This is used to set the default original size for the card shot function Specify a value from 1 25 mm to 8 1 2 216 mm in increments of 1 8 3...

Page 1132: ...White is selected the format is Encrypt PDF 4 When Black White is selected the format is PDF A 5 When the Scanner Function Expansion Kit is installed Black White Compression Mode None MH G3 MMR G4 Color Grayscale Compression Ratio Low Medium High Emphasize Black Letter Specified Pages per File Generates a separate file for each scanned page when multiple pages are scanned If this setting is enable...

Page 1133: ...led Default Setting of PDF Format for PC Browsing You can set the initial file format of public PDF which is created during execution of each job Compression Ratio Low Medium High Settings during each job execution When each of copy printer scanner Internet fax fax or stored scan data is executed you can specify to create a public PDF and to set the resolution of public PDF When the exposure is se...

Page 1134: ...ission of stored files is allowed Internet Fax Send including PC I Fax For each mode select whether or not I Fax transmission of stored fil es is allowed Fax Send Including PC Fax For each mode select whether or not fax transmission of stored files is allowed The items that appear will vary depending on the functions that have been added to the machine USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER...

Page 1135: ... deletion at the specified time on the specified day of the week Every Month Auto deletion at the specified time on the specified day of the month Folders To select the folder separately select Folder Select and select the desired folder To select all folders including the folder currently bein g created select All Folders Including folders registered hereafter Delete Protected File Enable this se...

Page 1136: ...ity Report Auto select Setting mode System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Receive Settings Duplex Reception Setting enabling you to specify 1 sided or 2 sided printing Administrator Settings List Lists of the administrator settings for the following modes can be printed Copying Printer Image Send Document filing Security Common All Administrator Settings List Image Sending Activity Repo...

Page 1137: ...ist Document Admin List Web Settings List This prints a list of the settings that are configured in Setting mode Web version Metadata Set List Prints a list of the settings that are configured in Setting mode Web version USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1137 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1138: ...eyboard is used IC Card Reader Writer Select whether the internal or external driver for the IC card reader writer driver is used USB Memory Select whether the internal or external device driver for the USB memory device driver is used Level of Encryption Select the level of encryption for communication using the external driver Select from none AES 128 or AES 256 When settings are changed the cha...

Page 1139: ...achine is restarted To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER To check the connection when a USB device is connected to the machine see USB DEVICE CHECK If the LCD Animation Playback or Balanced is selected the job or print process speed of the machine may drop Select Priority Printing to increase the process speed of print job USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharp...

Page 1140: ...ration Settings Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disables the Auto Clear mode Disabling of Job Priority Operation The job priority function can be disabled If disabled the Priority key is not shown on the job status screen Disabling of Bypass Printing Disables bypass printing printing other jobs ahead of a job that has been stopped because the paper required for the job is not in any of the trays This opti...

Page 1141: ... Large Capacity Cassette This setting is used to prohibit the use of the large capacity tray such as when it malfunctions Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer This setting is used to disable the optional paper drawer such as when it malfunctions Disabling of Tray Setting Disables the tray settings Disabling of Finisher This setting is used to prohibit the use of finisher or saddle finisher such as w...

Page 1142: ...ss tray is often used to feed label sheets transparency film and other special media for which 2 sided copying is prohibited If a sheet of one of these special media enters the reversing unit a misfeed or damage to the unit may result If special media for which 2 sided copying is prohibited is often used it is recommended that you enable this setting Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disables the ...

Page 1143: ...Memory Direct Print Disables the function for directly printing of a file in a USB memory device Disabling of Network Folder Direct Print Disables the direct printing from a network folder Disabling sending while printing Disables the Image Send function during printing Image Send Settings Disable Switching of Display Order Disables a change of display sequence search number order ascending descen...

Page 1144: ...ress Book Select All Selects all items Clear Checked Clears all selections Disable Registering Destination on Web Page Disables to store the destination from Setting mode Web version Configure the setting for each of the following items Group Direct Entry Group Address Book Individual Select All Selects all items Clear Checked Clears all selections Disabling of Registration Deletion of Program USE...

Page 1145: ...s Polling Memory Confidential Relay Broadcast Direct Entry Relay Broadcast Address Book Select All Selects all items Clear Checked Clears all selections Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address Search This disables address control from the global address search Configure the setting for each of the following items E mail Internet Fax Fax Select All Selects all items Clear Checked Clea...

Page 1146: ...x including Direct SMTP Fax Select All Selects all items Clear Checked Clears all selections Disable Direct Entry Disables the direct entry of destination address and others Configure the setting for each of the following items E mail Network Folder Desktop Network Folder Internet Fax including Direct SMTP Fax Select All Selects all items Clear Checked Clears all selections Disable PC I Fax Transm...

Page 1147: ... User Unknown key in the user selection screen Disable Storing to External Memory Device Storing to external memory device is disabled SECURITY SETTINGS This setting is used to set the security enhancement functions Hidden Pattern Print Setting Disables the direct entry of background pattern and others The Enable Disable Settings control the same parameters as the enable disable settings in other ...

Page 1148: ...etting information in XML format and copies the information to another machine This function saves you the trouble of repeatedly configuring the same settings in multiple machines Export Exports data to a USB memory device Import Imports data that you have saved in the USB memory device by Export option into the machine You can import data only to MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N The following data is n...

Page 1149: ...e such as screen contrast and saddle stitch position adjustment This function can be enabled when a USB memory device is installed This function cannot be used while Setting mode is in use while a job is being executed or when there is a reserved job Contact your dealer or the nearest SHARP Service Department listed on the Quick Start Guide for advice on the machine for data importing USER S MANUA...

Page 1150: ...kit E MAIL ALERT AND STATUS Enter the product key of e mail alert and status Application Integration Module Enter the product key of the application integration module XPS expansion kit Enter the product key of the XPS expansion kit Tapping or changes the display position of the numeric keys It may not be possible to use some settings depending on the peripheral devices installed USER S MANUAL MX ...

Page 1151: ...ower switch And then enter the product key of the Card solution kit Turn off the power key first and then turn off the main power switch The related function will be enabled when the power is turned on again For the product key to be entered contact your dealer USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1151 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14...

Page 1152: ...stored settings will be retained even if the Power button is turned off To retrieve the stored settings use Restore Configuration below Items not stored Network Settings These are not stored as unexpected settings may cause damage to the network Product Keys Product Keys are not stored as reissue of keys may be necessary Restore Configuration Restores the settings stored with Store Current Configu...

Page 1153: ...c Host Configuration Protocol BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol When this setting is enabled it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address RARP Set this option to use the RARP protocol IPv4 Address Enter the IP address of the machine Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask Default Gateway If DHCP BOOTP is used the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically If the IP address changes prin...

Page 1154: ...ress Prefix Length Enter the IP address and the prefix length 0 to 128 of the machine Default Gateway Default Gateway Network Name Settings Device Name Enter a device name If DHCPv6 is used the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically If the IP address changes printing will not be possible TIf the machine is used on a TCP IP network be sure to enable the Enable TCP IP In an IPv6...

Page 1155: ... from the server Enter an e mail address a single address only to receive such undelivered mails Usually enter the e mail address of system administrator Enable SSL If is selected the SMTP over TLS encryption communication can be used by STARTTLS command This requires the server to support the STARTTLS command To allow SSL communication set the Port Number to the same port number as the normal SMT...

Page 1156: ...rch for a specific area of the LDAP directory information tree Example o ABC ou NY cn Everyone Entries must be separated from each other by semicolons or commas LDAP Server Enter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server User Name Enter the account name for LDAP setting Password Enter the password Change Password To change the password set USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http ...

Page 1157: ...abled Connection Test Tap the Execute button to test the connection to the LDAP server Public Folder NAS Settings Set each option to Prohibited if the storage is not used When settings are changed the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Man...

Page 1158: ... Domain Name Enter the domain name Comment Enter a comment Reset the NIC This returns all Network Settings to the factory default settings When settings are changed the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1158 of 1441 3 1...

Page 1159: ...ic Host Configuration Protocol BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol When this setting is enabled it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address RARP Set this option to use the RARP protocol IPv4 Address Enter the IP address of the machine Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask If DHCP BOOTP is used the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically If the IP address changes printing will not b...

Page 1160: ...the machine Default Gateway Default Gateway Ping Command Checks if the machine can communicate with the PC of the network Specify the IP address of the desired PC and tap the Execute key A message indicating a response by the PC or not is displayed NetWare If DHCPv6 is used the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically If the IP address changes printing will not be possible If th...

Page 1161: ... PSERVER Settings Print Server Name Enter a print server name Login Password Enter the login password To change the password set Change Password to Check Interval Enter a job check interval Bindery Mode Set this option to use the Bindery mode File Server Name 1 8 Enter a file server name NDS Tree Enter the NDS tree name USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portal...

Page 1162: ...d Zone Name Enter a zone name Printer Name Enter the printer name NetBIOS NetBIOS Settings NBT WINS To use the machine on a NetBIOS network this setting must be enabled When settings are changed the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manua...

Page 1163: ...lt setting is 20 seconds This time is used until the connection to the DNS server is established according to the standard specifications Domain Name Enter the domain name where the selected DNS server exists Dynamic DNS Updating Set this option to use the dynamic updating of DNS server Updating Interval Enter an interval to update the DNS server WINS WINS Settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N ...

Page 1164: ...server and for data transmission according to the e mail system specifications Source Address If data transmission has failed the undelivered e mail may be returned from the server Enter an e mail address a single address only to receive such undelivered mails Usually enter the e mail address of system administrator Enable SSL If the SSL is enabled the SMTP over TLS encryption communication can be...

Page 1165: ...P is used for authentication to the POP3 server User Name Enter the user name for POP before SMTP communication Password Enter the password required for POP before SMTP communication To change the password set Change Password to Enable SSL If set to the POP over SSL communication or the POP over TLS communication by STLS command is enabled This requires the server to support the POP over SSL commu...

Page 1166: ...munity set TRAP Community Enter the community name to be used for the SNMP TRAP sent from the device TRAP Target Address Enter the IP address of the destination computer for SNMP TRAP communication SNMP v3 Settings SNMP v3 Settings Set this option to use the SNMPv3 settings User Name Enter the user name Authentication Key Select an algorithm enter the authentication key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M...

Page 1167: ...ntication server The default setting is port 88 Realm Enter the Kerberos realm SNTP SNTP Settings SNTP Set this option to use the SNTP protocol SNTP Server Enter the IP address or host name of the SNTP server Port Number Enter a port number The default setting is port 123 Timeout Enter a timeout The default setting is 5 seconds USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa co...

Page 1168: ...ngs mDNS Set this option to use the mDNS settings Service Name Enter a service name Domain Name Enter the domain name Priority Service Select a service you use with the priority When settings are changed the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downlo...

Page 1169: ...alid Raw Raw Print Settings Raw Print Set this option to use RAW printing The default setting is Valid Port Number Enter a port number The default setting is port 9100 Timeout Enter a timeout The default setting is 90 seconds Use Bidirectional To use bidirectional communication set to USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 116...

Page 1170: ... to use multicast discovery When settings are changed the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1170 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1171: ...ABC ou NY cn Everyone Entries must be separated by semicolons or commas LDAP Server Enter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server Server Type Select the Default or Custom from the service type list The default s etting is Default User ID Property Set the user ID property The default setting is uid LDAP Search Property Set the LDAP search property The default setting is cn E mail Address Sea...

Page 1172: ...ation Set whether the login name password for user authentication is us ed for the user name password for home directory path authenticati on User Name Enter a maximum of 127 full width half width characters for the user name for home directory path authentication Password Enter a maximum of 255 numeric digits for the password for home dir ectory path authentication Custom Property 1 10 Enter each...

Page 1173: ...the Execute button and the connection test is executed and it s result is displayed When settings are changed the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1173 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1174: ... can be accessed shared If the Use of Storage is set to Allow you can use the shared fol der as a network folder faxreceive If the Use of Storage in set to Allow you can use the faxreceive folder as a fax Internet fax received data The faxreceive folder c ontains files of Inbound Routing HDD Storage Settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 download...

Page 1175: ...sword to allow access to the proxy server Port Number Enter the proxy server port number Address without using proxy Specify exception addresses for a proxy that is used in the Web brow sing feature and Sharp OSA When you enter multiple addresses sep arate them by a semicolon USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1175 of 1441...

Page 1176: ...and IP addresses Show Wireless Setting Screen Click the Setup button In the Wireless Setting screen you can configure the SSID of a wireless LAN Security Type Encry and Security Key Initialize Wireless Settings Click the Initialize button The settings for SSID Security Type Encry and Security Key are initialized Wireless Setting screen Access Point Mode If the Settings button is clicked while Conn...

Page 1177: ...decimal number WAP WAP2 8 to 63 characters or 64 digit hexadecimal number Show Security Key If it is set to ON the security key appears Device IP Address Enter the IP address Channel to Be Used Select the channel to be used in wireless LAN Sending Output Configure the sending output Bandwidth Use this setting when the communication mode is 11n Select the bandwidth to be used USER S MANUAL MX M365N...

Page 1178: ...to search access points When the search results are displayed select the access point to use and click OK SSID Security Type and Encry are automatically applied SSID Enter an SSID using up to 32 characters Security Type Select a security type Encry Select an encryption type Security Key Enter a security key Security Type Security Key WEP 64bit 5 characters or 10 digit hexadecimal number WEP 128bit...

Page 1179: ...how Security Key If it is set to ON the security key appears USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1179 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1180: ...rsion simultaneously Auto Logout Time Enter a time to automatically log out when no communication continues with the machine When settings are changed the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1180 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM...

Page 1181: ...played Log Out All Users The current login users are logged out When settings are changed the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted To restart the machine see TURNING ON THE POWER USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1181 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1182: ...xt on the list the edit screen appears for that text Tap the Delete key to delete the text Custom Watermark Add key Adds a new custom watermark List Lists the currently stored custom watermarks Store Custom Watermark When you tap the Add key the registration screen appears Up to 30 items can be stored For information on the settings see Settings Edit or Delete Custom Watermark USER S MANUAL MX M36...

Page 1183: ...tom stamps Store Custom Stamp When you tap the Add key the registration screen appears Up to 30 items can be stored For information on the settings see Settings Edit or Delete Custom Stamp When you tap a file name on the list the edit screen appears for that custom stamp Tap the Delete key to delete the custom stamp Settings Item Description File Name Enter a file name using a maximum of 30 charac...

Page 1184: ...File Property Select a file sharing type USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1184 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1185: ... When you tap the Add key the registration screen appears Up to 30 items can be stored Edit or Delete Subject Name When you tap a subject name on the list the edit screen appears for that subject Tap the Delete key to delete the subject name USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1185 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1186: ...stration screen appears Up to 30 items can be stored Edit or Delete File Name When you tap a file name on the list the edit screen appears for that file name Tap the Delete key to delete the file name USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1186 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1187: ...ap the Add key the registration screen appears A title and a message body can be set Up to 30 items can be stored Edit or Delete Message Body When you tap a title on the list the edit screen appears for that message Tap the Delete key to delete the message USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1187 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1188: ...a Default Subject Enter a subject of e mail to send it during network scanner E mail transmission Add Job Information Automatically to the Mail Message Body When an e mail is sent the job information is added to the mail text automatically Add a Footer Automatically to the Mail Message Body When sending data to the same destination two or more times set the Unique Identifier to not to overwrite th...

Page 1189: ...r is added automatically Mail Footer Registration Enter the text to be printed as the mail footer USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1189 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1190: ...sed for authentication to the POP3 server User Name Enter the user name The special user account is required for Internet fax reception Password Enter the password To change the password select Change Password and enter the new password in the text box POP3 Communication Timeout Set a timeout for communication to the POP3 server Reception Check Interval Setting Enter an acknowledge cycle to the PO...

Page 1191: ...ame and Address Set Set these options to store the sender name and source address to be used for Internet fax communication The stored sender name and source address will be printed at the top of the received fax Sender Name Enter the default sender name I Fax Own Address Enter the default source address Direct SMTP Settings Port Number Receive Enter the receive port number for direct SMTP communi...

Page 1192: ...25 Timeout Enter a timeout USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1192 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1193: ...rk Folder data can be stored Item Description Forward Table Name Enter a forward table name Receive Line Select Selects a data receive line Sender Number Address S etting Select the sender facsimile number or the Internet fax address Before you select a sender number or address store the destinatio n number or address To forward all received data select Forward All Received Data Add Enters your se...

Page 1194: ...mber Enter a facsimile number to be stored as the sender When you ent er multiple sender numbers separate them by a semicolon or a c omma When you tap the Global Address Search key the global address search screen appears I Fax Address Enter an Internet fax address to be stored as the sender When you enter multiple sender numbers separate them by a semicolon or a comma When you tap the Global Addr...

Page 1195: ...e name Enter up to 64 full width half width characters File Naming No 1 to No 7 Set the information included in the file name when saving a file When stored in the address book change the sender na me to the contact name When the sender of the data is stored in the address book the sen der information is changed to the name stored in the address book Operation Enable the Inbound Routing function T...

Page 1196: ...rding table name that you wish to enable to To specify forwarding conditions select Forward based on the Conditions of Forward Destination 1 3 and also select Always Forward or Forward on Selected Day Time If you have selected the Forward on Selected Day Time option you can set the forwarding date and time in advance address separately USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sha...

Page 1197: ...eived data E mail Network Folder FTP Desktop Select a forwarding type of the send or received image data When de termined select the destination from the address book You can enter an e mail directly Format Select a format for data forwarding Release Settings Releases the destination settings File Format Format Select a format for data forwarding USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S htt...

Page 1198: ...ng Metadata Sets When you tap the Add key the registration screen appears Up to 10 items can be stored For information on the settings see Settings Edit or Delete Metadata Set When you tap a title on the list the edit screen appears for that metadata set Tap the Delete key to delete the metadata set Settings Item Description Metadata Set Name Enter a metadata name Metadata Delivery Destinati on Se...

Page 1199: ...a from the previously entered data list You must enter optional values for metadata selection in the input area Entries must be separated by semicolons or commas Each option can be comprised of up to 70 characters Initial entry by default Uses a default value as the first value of the entered metadata list Expand Metadata Automatic ally When the machine generates metadata automatically the metadat...

Page 1200: ...that standard application Tap the Delete key to delete the standard application Settings Item Description Application Name Enter an application name Address for Application UI Set an IP address of the application or a network name to control the UI of the machine Embedded Application Name The embedded application name is displayed Timeout Enter a timeout The default setting is 20 seconds Expansion...

Page 1201: ...ation Use Custom Icon Select whether or not custom icon is used File Name Reports file name Select File Type the file name These functions can be set only in the Web page USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1201 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1202: ... Enter a timeout The default setting is 20 seconds Use Proxy Server A network access via the proxy server is allowed E mail Address Enter the address to which a notification e mail is sent when an application connection error occurs Body Text Enter the body message that appears in the notification e mail for connecti on errors Connection Test To test the connection to the application click the Exe...

Page 1203: ...ble it Application Name Enter an application name Address for Application UI Enter the URL of the login screen to be accessed first when the mac hine is turned on Address for Web Service Enter the URL of the server or computer which sends commands and events by XML SOAP protocol Timeout Enter a timeout The default setting is 20 seconds Extended Platform Set this option to use the expansion platfor...

Page 1204: ...e body message that appears in the notification e mail for co nnection errors USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1204 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1205: ...ng or editing an URL address of the hom e page Disable Print from Web Brow se Mode Prevents users from printing from a Web browser or a PDF viewer tha t is displayed in a Web browser Disable display of History Prevents users from viewing the history of Web pages that were displ ayed Use a Proxy Server Shows a Web page via a proxy server Always display Proxy Authen tication Dialogue Shows the Proxy...

Page 1206: ...Select whether the internal or external driver for the external keyboa rd is used USB Memory Select whether the internal or external device driver for the USB me mory device driver is used Level of Encryption Select the level of encryption for communication using the external d river USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1206...

Page 1207: ...ard disk and also print Only print when save error occurs Print received fax when save fails Save in inbound routing error box when save fails When save fails save the fax in the inbound routing error box File format Select the file format for inbound routing Preset characters Set the characters added to the file name when a file is saved When Character 1 and Character 2 are set in File Naming No ...

Page 1208: ... Address Search Select the address from the global addresses Add to list An address directly entered or found by global address search is save d as the notification address USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1208 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1209: ...ge Passw ord and enter the new password in the text box Check Interval Enter the polling interval for the POP3 server The default setting is fi ve minutes Enable SSL If set to the POP over SSL communication or the POP over TL S communication by STLS command is enabled This requires the ser ver to support the POP over SSL communication or the STLS comm and To allow the POP over SSL communication se...

Page 1210: ...e edit screen appears for that FTP server Tap the Delete key to delete the FTP server Settings Item Description Name Enter a name to be displayed on the machine operator panel FTP Server Enter the IP address or host name of the FTP server Directory Enter the destination directory of the FTP file server Enable User Authentication Enables user authentication The user name and password are requir ed ...

Page 1211: ...a nge the password select Change Password and enter the new password in the text box Enable SSL Enables the SSL encryption communication USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1211 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1212: ...een appears for that network folder Tap the Delete key to delete the folder Settings Item Description Name Enter a name to be displayed on the machine operator panel Folder Path Enter a path to the network folder Enable User Authentication Enables user authentication The user name and password are requir ed to enter User Name Enter the user name used for logging in the network folder Password Ente...

Page 1213: ...password in the text box USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1213 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1214: ...escription FTP Print Enable the FTP printing when data is moved to the FTP server of the machine Enabled by default Port Number Enter a port number The default setting is port 21 Use Banner Enable or disable a banner Disabled by default USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1214 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1215: ...ply Setting values applied by each mode is as follows Energy Save Normal Mode Eco Mode Eco Scan On Sending Modes Only On All Modes Except Copy Auto Power Shut Off Timer Change transition time by tim e of day Auto Fix transition time On 1min As soon as the remote job is finished ente r Auto power shut off mode Off On Preheat Mode Setting 1min 1min Turn off Panel Display during pre heat mod e On On ...

Page 1216: ... Off Set Eco Scan Setting to and select a mode or screen in which to enable Eco Scan Setting The following modes and screens can be set Home Screen Copy Image Send Document Filing System Settings SharpOSA USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1216 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1217: ...t best suits the needs of your workplace The panel display can be turned Off in the Preheat mode The Auto Power Off transition time is fixed The Auto Power Off transition time is fixed When this setting is enabled the Change transition time by time of day option is disabled As soon as the remote job is finished enter Auto power shut off mode This function works in Auto Power Shut Off mode When the...

Page 1218: ...ory default setting Auto This function controls the power optimally for each time period by analyzing the use of machine based on job logs obtained during a certain time period The image transfer control settings are not changed This does not link to the Power On Off Scheduling If both of them are enabled the Power On Off Scheduling settings precede Pages are counted for each paper size separately...

Page 1219: ...nergy Saving Priority2 at other times Specific Date Operation Settings You can configure a day on which you have high output printing or want to perform a special operation as the specific date and set a specific energy saving pattern only for that specific date Specific Date tab You can configure a day on which you have high output printing or want to perform a special operation as the specific d...

Page 1220: ...eration Select a specific date pattern you want to specify Change Pattern Name Enter a pattern name when you want to change the name of a specific date pattern Pattern to Be Modeled Select a source pattern when you create a pattern using a stored or preset pattern Add new schedule Add a schedule Holiday tab Specify a holiday The day you specified as the holiday will not be a specific date If a spe...

Page 1221: ...e of Entry into Preheat Mode Auto Power Shut Off Mode Set whether a message is displayed 15 seconds before Preheat Mode or Auto Power Shutoff Mode is entered Sleep Mode Power Level Set whether to give priority to Low Power or Fast Wake Up Low Power The machine switches to the power saving mode but it takes some time to recover Fast Wake Up Compared with Low Power the power value rises by a certain...

Page 1222: ...ing Toner consumption can be selected from three levels Toner Save1 Toner Consumption Much Toner Save2 Toner Consumption Middle Toner Save3 Toner Consumption Little Items may not be displayed depending on the machine settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1222 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1223: ...can receive output jobs such as received fax data outputs If the Time Specified Output of Received Data setting is enabled they are output next time the machine is turned on If the power management setting is also enabled the Power On Off Scheduling settings precede If the same time is specified settings are applied in the order of Setting 1 Setting 2 and Setting 3 The power is not turned off in t...

Page 1224: ...dresses separate them by a semicolon or a comma Send Now When tapped the status message is sent to the destination of the e mail address list Send on Schedule 1 If checked as an E mail is sent periodically according to the pre set schedule Send on Schedule 2 If checked as an E mail is sent periodically according to the pre set schedule Scheduling Select a schedule to send E mails Advanced Settings...

Page 1225: ...unication set the Port Number to the POP ove r SSL communication port number To allow POP over TLS communication set the Port Number to th e same port number as for the normal POP3 communication Connection Test Tap the Execute button to test the connection to the POP3 server Alerts Message Selects the E mail Alert function settings The E mail Alert function can report a trouble of the machine to t...

Page 1226: ...b Log Views log of a job executed on the machine Select a view item and period and tap the Show key You can save the job log by selecting the Job Log in Setting mode Web version USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1226 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1227: ...the current Print Hold Job is turned ON the settings below can be selected Item Description Force Retention This setting forcibly sets all print jobs as print hold jobs even jobs for which print hold is not selected Disable Job Prohibit all print jobs other than print hold jobs USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1227 of 14...

Page 1228: ...at you have registered with this option The administrator level authentication password is required to select all settings and the same functions as those available with the user level password When you log on enter admin as the user name Then enter the administrator password that you have registered with this option If you tap the Store key without entering a password the previously set value is ...

Page 1229: ... RARP SMTP WSD USB Device Expansion when Application Communication Module or External Account Module is enabled Sharp OSA when Application Communication Module or Ext ernal Account Module is enabl ed HTTP HTTPS HTTP HTTPS FTP FTPS SMTP SMTP SSL POP3 POP3 SSL SNMP TRAP Notify Job End LDAP LDAP SSL SMB WINS SNTP mDNS Tandem Output Send Data Backup Send USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S...

Page 1230: ... Filter Settings This option sets an IP address You can specify whether to allow or prohibit access to the machine from the IP address you set MAC Address Filter Settings This option sets a MAC address It allows access to the machine from the MAC address you set USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1230 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 1...

Page 1231: ...setting is enabled all communication that attempts to access the machine by HTTP is redirected to HTTPS Client Port HTTPS Apply SSL encryption to HTTP communication FTPS Apply SSL encryption to FTP communication SMTP SSL Apply SSL encryption to SMTP communication POP3 SSL Apply SSL encryption to POP3 communication LDAP SSL Apply SSL encryption to LDAP communication Level of Encryption The encrypti...

Page 1232: ... can enable or disable IEEE802 1X authentication with this setting The IEEE802 1X details can be set with Setting mode Web version Depending on the Web page settings connection to the machine may not be allowed or the settings may not allow printing scanning or Setting mode Web version display In this case deselect this setting and change the Setting mode Web version settings USER S MANUAL MX M365...

Page 1233: ...ed if you enter the password incorrectly three consecutive times Password for FTP pull print To enable these features touch OK when a message for confirming whether or not to enable the features appears and enter the same code as that shown on the Security code input screen Touch the Execute key Then restart the device After restarting you can select from one to seven times for the Clearance Time ...

Page 1234: ...f an incorrect password Touch the Release Lock on File Folder Operation key and then the Release key to release all locked items After this is done the items can be manipulated When no items are locked the Release Lock on File Folder Operation key is grayed out USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1234 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14...

Page 1235: ...IPsec settings are configured with Setting mode Web version When enabling this settings take the following notes It may take some time to reflect on the machine settings and you cannot connect to the machine during this time If the Setting mode Web version settings are not correctly selected connection to the machine may not be allowed or the settings may not allow printing scanning or Setting mod...

Page 1236: ...r angle Font Style Select the standard or italic character settings Camouflage Pattern Set a camouflage pattern Print Method Select a character display pattern Character stand out The background stands out Print Contents Setting Item Description Standard Characters Allows you to select a preset character string The following character strings can be selected DO NOT COPY Copy Ban Internal Use Only ...

Page 1237: ...ount job ID login name user number number of copy control date and time Disable Direct Entry Directly enters the user name This setting is ignored if Pre set Text is enabled Contrast Set a character contrast The black magenta and cyan can be set in any of 9 levels Store Print Characters Stores the user created print characters Up to 30 characters can be stored USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M5...

Page 1238: ...the tracking information Print Data The following information can be printed Serial number characters account job ID login name user number date and time Print Position Set a print position on each page Select the Job to Print Set a job to print the tracking information USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1238 of 1441 3 17 ...

Page 1239: ...dress books and related private data All data in user information All Job Data inside Machine Programs Pre set Text Job logs Setting information on the system settings initialized to the factory default Clearance Time Settings Clearance Time Settings appears if the data security function is enabled under Setting mode administrator by selecting System Settings Security Settings Security code input ...

Page 1240: ...ttings Auto Reception Yes Yes Multiple Set Print Disabled Yes Yes Staple 1 Disabled Yes Yes Forward Received Data Yes Yes Image Send Settings Fax Functions No Yes Fax Settings No Yes Fax Default Settings No Yes Dial Mode Setting Tone No Yes Auto Wake Up Print Enabled No Yes Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed it may not be possible to use some settings USER S M...

Page 1241: ...e Signal Volume 5 Tone Pattern 3 Transmission Complete S ound Time Setting 3 sec No Yes Fax Communication Error S ignal Volume 5 Tone Pattern 3 Transmission Complete S ound Time Setting 0 3 se c each No Yes Remote Reception Number Se tting 5 No Yes Original Print on Transaction Report Print Out Error Report O nly No Yes Transaction Report Print Select Setting No Yes Single Sending Print Out Error ...

Page 1242: ... Disabled No Yes Fax Send Settings No Yes Auto Reduction Sending Setti ng Enabled No Yes Rotation Sending Setting All Enabled No Yes Quick On Line Sending Enabled No Yes Printing Page Number at Rece iver Enabled No Yes Sender Destination Name Cha nge Fax No No Yes Date Own Number Print Posit ion Setting Outside the Original Imag e No Yes Recall in Case of Line Busy Recall Times 2 Interval 3 minute...

Page 1243: ...Forwarding No Yes Receiving Date Time Print Disabled No Yes A3 RX Reduce Disabled No Yes Fax Output Settings Varies depending on the machine configuration No Yes Number of Prints 1 No Yes Staple Settings 1 1 Staple at Back No Yes Paper Size 8 1 2 x 11 or 8 1 2 x 11 R No Yes Allow Reject Number Setting No Yes Allow Reject Number Setting All Disabled No Yes Reject Unknown Calls Disabled No Yes Fax P...

Page 1244: ... Security Enabled No Yes 1 When a saddle finisher or finisher is installed USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1244 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1245: ...e edit screen appears for the box For information on the settings see Settings Tap the Delete key to delete the memory box Settings Item Description Items common to all types Box Type Select the type of box Polling Memory Store a memory box for F code polling memory The sub address and passcode that you store in the memory box are necessary for the other machine to poll the machine request transmi...

Page 1246: ...IN Set a Print PIN for confidential reception Enter a 4 digit number Items displayed when storing a relay broadcast memory box Recipients Select the end recipients of the relay broadcast Select the recipient s from the address book Select the recipient from the address book Selects an address from the address book Destination Entry An address that is not stored in the address book can be directly ...

Page 1247: ...vent that you forget the Print PIN or need to verify the Print PIN contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1247 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1248: ... A binding style can be set with the Fax Output Settings Forward Received Data When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of to ner received faxes can be forwarded to another previously stored fax machine If there is no forwarding data or if the destination is not registered no data is forwarded If Hold Setting for Received Data Print is enabled you are prompted to enter a pas...

Page 1249: ...d in the F code confidential memory box is not forwarded For destination number registration see Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding in Setting mode USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1249 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1250: ...ower switch is and a fax is received this function activates the machine and prints the fax When this function is disabled received faxes are not printed until the Power button is switched On Pause Time Setting Changes the length of pauses inserted in fax numbers If a hyphen is entered when dialing or storing a fax number a pause of 2 seconds is inserted It can be set between 1 and 15 seconds in e...

Page 1251: ...the Remote Reception number and it can be between 0 and 9 Original Print on Transaction Report When a transaction report is printed this is used to print part of the first page of the transmitted original on the transaction report Select one of the settings below Print Out All Report Print Out Error Report Only Do not Print This setting will not be effective if the next Transaction Report Print Se...

Page 1252: ... at a specified time once a day only The settings can be simultaneously enabled ECM Line conditions can sometimes distort a transmitted fax image When ECM Error When transaction report printing is set for Receiving a report will not be printed for a reception from a number specified as a reject number in Allow Reject Number Setting If you only select the Print Daily at Designated Time setting and ...

Page 1253: ...d faxes are sent at full size Because the size is not adjusted to match the size of the printing paper part of the received fax may be cut off Rotation Sending Setting When transmitting an image that is one of the following sizes this function rotates the image 90 degrees counterclockwise The setting can be configured separately for each size 8 1 2 x11 5 1 2 x8 1 2 R A4 B5R A5R 16K Quick On Line S...

Page 1254: ...ll attempts when a transmission is not successful due to the line being busy or other reason Number of Times to Recall When Line is Busy This setting specifies whether or not recalling is performed when the line is busy During recalling you can set the number of recall attempts Any number from 1 to 15 can be selected Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts min When Line is Busy The interval betwe...

Page 1255: ...s received the pages must be the same size the pages are printed on both sides of the paper Auto Receive Reduce Setting When a fax is received that includes printed information such as the sender s name and address the received image is slightly larger than the standard size This setting is used to automatically reduce the image to fit the standard size When this setting is enabled note that the m...

Page 1256: ...mber for Data Forwarding When a problem prevents the machine from printing a received fax the received fax can be forwarded to another fax machine This setting is used to program the fax number of the destination fax machine Only one forwarding fax number can be programmed maximum of 64 digits To insert a pause between digits of the number tap the key If you wish to specify an F code confidential ...

Page 1257: ...s that are printed to any number from 1 to 99 Staple Settings When a finisher is installed set the position at which received faxes are stapled Paper Size When a finisher is installed select the paper used for printing of received faxes The Outside the Received Image cannot be selected for the reception date and time print setting if Auto Receive Reduce Setting is not enabled When this setting is ...

Page 1258: ...e key Registration Number List A list of the stored numbers can be displayed When you select a number from this screen it is deleted from the list Reject Unknown Calls If checked any call from the number of Reject Unknown Calls setting is rejected regardless of the certain number receive settings Fax Polling Security The following settings are for regular polling memory using the Public Box Pollin...

Page 1259: ...bers can be stored Each number must be within 20 digits in length Passcode Number Key List This shows a list of the stored passcode numbers Select a number from the list and delete it Note that these settings do not apply to F code polling memory USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1259 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1260: ... Cancel Print or Cancel Transmission key To cancel job Remove the pending jobs in the Job Status screen STOPPING DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED To clear entered numeric values Tap the C key USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1260 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1261: ...ons may have been disabled in the setting mode Check wit h your administrator When user authentication is enabled the functions that you can use m ay be restricted in your user settings Check with your administrator When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may d...

Page 1262: ...quired however some combinations are not possible If a prohibited combination i s selected a message will appear in the touch panel Is Rotation Copy Setti ng disabled in the setti ng mode Check with your administrator If you are the administrator enable Rotation Copy Setting Select System Settings Copy Settings Rotation Copy Setting Rotation Copy in Setting mode When the background color of the jo...

Page 1263: ...per types and sizes that can be used for two sided copying see SPECIFICATIONS in Quick Start Guide Are you copying using settings that do not allow 2 sided copying 2 Sided Copy can generally be combined with other modes as required however some combinations are not possible If a pro hibited combination is selected a message will appear in the to uch panel Have functions been disabled by th e admin...

Page 1264: ...eck Solution Have functions been disabled by th e administrator Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode C heck with your administrator When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received...

Page 1265: ...s the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and printed photographs such as a magazine or catalogue Text Photo This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and photographs such as a text document with a photo pasted on Printed Photo This mode is best for copying printed photographs such as photos in a magazine or catalogue Photo Use t...

Page 1266: ...r a copy or printed as an original Copy of Copy is available when Auto Text Printed Photo or Text Printed Photo is selected as the original image type USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1266 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1267: ...ted for the original size and paper size Select an appropriate ratio setting Are you using an inch AB size original When copying an inch AB size original specif y the original size manually When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or ca...

Page 1268: ...e up or face down cor rectly When using the document glass the original must be placed face d own When using the automatic document feeder the original must be placed face up When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data be...

Page 1269: ...dows Check the IP address setting If the machine does not have a permanent IP address the machine rec eives an IP address from a DHCP server printing will not be possible if the IP address changes Print the All Custom Setting List in the setting mode and check the I P address of the machine If the IP address has changed change the p ort setting for the printer driver Setting mode List Print User A...

Page 1270: ...ter driver has been selected f rom the print window of the application If the machine s printer driver does not appear in the list of available pri nter drivers it may not be installed correctly Remove the printer driver and then install it once again See Software Setup Guide Are the network connecti on devices operating norm ally Make sure that the routers and other network connection devic es ar...

Page 1271: ...ns The print job is too large to fit in memory A function that has been prohibited by the administrator is specified By factory default Notice Pages are not printed Have functions been disabl ed by the administrator Check with your administrator When user authentication is enabled the functions that you can use m ay be restricted in your user settings Check with your administrator USER S MANUAL MX...

Page 1272: ...e Paper Tray Settings Tray Registra tion Are you using a special size or type of paper For the paper types and sizes that can be used for t wo sided printing see SPECIFICATIONS in Quick Start Guide Have functions been disabled by the a dministrator Check with your administrator Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mod e Check with your administrator When user authentication is enab...

Page 1273: ...ministrator When IPsec Settings is enabled in the setting mode direct printing of a file in a shared folder may not be possible in your PC environment For information about IPsec Settings consult your administrator Setting mode Security Settings IPsec Settings When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main pow...

Page 1274: ... installed on the machine been configured with the print er driver Open the printer properties dialog box and clic k the Auto Configuration button on the Opti ons tab Windows If auto configuration cannot be executed see the Software Setup Guide When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unp...

Page 1275: ...ect a print mode from Normal High Quality or Ultra Fine When you need a very clear image select Ult ra Fine Windows The resolution setting is selected in the Advanced tab of t he printer driver properties window Macintosh Select the resolution in the Advanced menu of the print window When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not...

Page 1276: ...printer driver Correct brightness and contrast with Color Adjustment Settings on the Adva nced tab of the printer driver Use these settings to make simple corrections i n a case such as when image editing software is not installed on your compute r When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or...

Page 1277: ...nt and di fficult to see To have color text or lines areas that could become faint converted to black select Text To Black or Vector To Black on the Advanced tab of the printe r driver Raster data such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted You can also adjust the line thickness adjust the line width in Line Width Settings o n the Advanced tab When the background color of the job status display at th...

Page 1278: ... in the Page Set up menu Is the print orientation setting portrait or land scape correct Set the print orientation to match the image Windows The setting is selected in the Main tab of the printer driver Macintosh The setting is selected in the Page Set up menu Are the margins set correctly in the layout se ttings of the application Select an appropriate paper size and margins in the layout settin...

Page 1279: ...80 degrees before printing Windows The setting is selected in the Main tab of the printer driver Macintosh OS X 10 4 to 10 5 The setting is selected using the Page S etup menu Landscape orientation only Is the correct binding po sition selected for 2 sid ed printing Be sure to set the appropriate binding position When 2 sided printing is performed every other page is printed upside do wn when tabl...

Page 1280: ...Macintosh Double click the name of the machine in the printer list select the jo b that you wish to delete and delete it At the machine Tap the job status display on the operation panel tap the Print tab to change the screen tap the key of the print job that you wish to delete an d tap the Stop Delete key A message will appear to confirm the cancelation T ap the Cancel key If some printed characte...

Page 1281: ...e transmission is temporarily cancel ed and then automatically attempted again after a brief interval F actory default setting 2 attempts 3 min intervals Setting mode System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Send Settings Recall in Case of Line B usy To cancel the transmission tap the job status display on the oper ation panel tap the key of the print job that you wish to delete a nd tap t...

Page 1282: ...atus screen co mpleted jobs or a transaction re port indicate that the transmissi on was not successful Perform the transmission again If the transmission is still not successful after recalling is perform ed as set in Recall in Case of Line Busy or Recall in Case of C ommunication Error the transmission failure will be indicated in t he job status screen and the transaction report Setting mode Sy...

Page 1283: ...ine to make sur e that the sub address and passcode are correct Have functions been disabled by the administrator Check with your administrator When user authentication is enabled the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings Check with your adm inistrator USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1283 of...

Page 1284: ...nt glass the original must be placed face down When using the automatic document feeder the original m ust be placed face up Place the original correctly and send the f ax again If the receiving machine is using thermal paper was the thermal p aper loaded with the wrong side out Check with the operator of the other machine When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corn...

Page 1285: ... not rotated an ori ginal placed in the vertical orientation may be reduced by the receiving machine Setting mode System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Setting s Send Settings Rotation Sending Setting If Mixed Size Original is enabled in Others and an original with a different width is sent rotate transmission will be disabled When the background color of the job status display at the upper righ...

Page 1286: ... correct time Setting mode System Settings Default Settings Clock A djust Is a transmission in progr ess If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives th e timer operation will begin after that transmission is finished When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unpl...

Page 1287: ...on Settings Default Settings Hold Setting for Rec eived Data Print Has cut off printing been disab led in the setting mode admini strator Load the same size of paper as the received fax If Print Actual Size Cut off Disabled is enabled in Print Style Sett ing in the setting mode administrator and a fax is received that is larger than any paper that is loaded the fax will be received and sto red in ...

Page 1288: ... utomatically forwarded to a specified address If Print at Error is s elected when Inbound Routing is enabled received faxes will only b e printed when an error occurs Setting mode Application Se ttings Administration Settings Inbound Routing Settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1288 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1289: ... e available memory space for receiving faxes The memory contains data that has been received with the received image check setting enabled The memory contains data that has been received with confidential reception or that is protected by a password A fax is stored in the memory box When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not...

Page 1290: ...heck Solution Is the original that was faxed also faint Ask the other party to send the fax again using a suitable dar ker exposure setting When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or received to be lost U...

Page 1291: ...ve faxes automatically Setting mode System Settings Fax Data Receive Forward Fax Settings Receive Settings Is little free memory remainin g Increase the amount of free memory The amount of free memory can be increased by printing faxes receiv ed by confidential reception and other password protected received data and by deleting data stored in memory boxes When the background color of the job stat...

Page 1292: ...ion telepho ne connected Check the connections Check the telephone line jack the wall jack and any extension adapters t o make sure that all connections are secure When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored ...

Page 1293: ...ng the speaker you will be able to hear the voice of the other party b ut he or she will not hear your voice Use the extension telephone When the optional receiver or extension telephone is not installed you cannot talk to the other party When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug th...

Page 1294: ...check Solution Has the volume been set to a lo w level in the setting mode Ask your administrator to set the volumes in Speaker Setti ngs to a higher level Setting mode System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Default Settings Speaker Settings When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch...

Page 1295: ...Solution Has the ringer volume been set t o None in the setting mode Ask your administrator to set the volumes in Speaker Set tings to other than None Setting mode System Settings Image Send Settings Fax Settings Default Settings Speaker Settings When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or u...

Page 1296: ...f stored keys Delete one touch keys and group keys that are not being use d Have functions been disabled by th e administrator Check with your administrator Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode C heck with your administrator When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or un...

Page 1297: ... ed transmission or a transmission in progress Wait until the transmission is finished or cancel the reserv ed transmission and then edit or delete the key Is the key included in a program k ey Remove the key from the program and then edit or delete the key If the key is included in multiple programs it must be removed fr om all programs Call Program Delete in the action panel for each mode Is the...

Page 1298: ...trator Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode Has your administrator enabled a function that prevents editing del eting Check with your administrator If your administrator has enabled settings such as Inbound Rout ing Settings keys cannot be edited or removed Setting mode Application Settings Inbound Routing S ettings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sh...

Page 1299: ...eeds the limit cannot be transmitted Did the image file exceed the file att achment size limit of your mail serve r When Scan to E mail is used Reduce the size of the file attachment reduce the num ber of pages to scan for one e mail transmission The size of the file can also be reduced by scanning using a l ower resolution setting Ask your mail server administrator or Internet service provider et...

Page 1300: ...ument feeder A long original cannot be scanned from the document glass Did you place an original that is fold ed Following the instructions in the display unfold the orig inal place it in the automatic document feeder again a nd re scan it If a folded original is placed in the automatic document feeder an error will occur and scanning will be canceled when the ac tual original size is detected dur...

Page 1301: ...h your administrator Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode When user authentication is enabled the functions that you can use m ay be restricted in your user settings Check with your administrator When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may ...

Page 1302: ...our administrator Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode When user authentication is enabled the functions that you can use m ay be restricted in your user settings Check with your administrator When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may dam...

Page 1303: ...al very light Is the color in the original very dark almost black Is only a very small area of the original colored Specify the color mode manually When the color mode is set to Auto the machine detects whether the or iginal is black and white or color when the Start key is tapped however i n the cases as shown on the left automatic detection may not give the co rrect result When the background co...

Page 1304: ... compression mode The recipient may be able to open the file if you change the file type and compression mode selected at the time of transmission Does a message appear prompting you to enter your password Ask the sender for the password or have the imag e sent again in a non encrypted format The received file is an encrypted PDF file When the background color of the job status display at the uppe...

Page 1305: ...nd Scan to External Memory Device and 200x100dpi in Internet fax mode If the original does not contain a halftone image such as a photo or illustration scanning at the default resolution will create a more practical and useful image A higher resolution s etting or the Half Tone setting in Internet fax mode only should only be selected if th e original contains a photo and you wish to give priority...

Page 1306: ...ination tap the Cancel key If you are the administrator and wish to change or disable the default destination change the settings as appropriate in Default Address Se tting Setting mode System Settings Image Send Settings S can Settings Default Address Default Address Setting When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch ...

Page 1307: ...device re cognized correctly Use USB Device Check in the setting mode to check wh ether or not the device is recognized Setting mode System Settings USB Device Check If it is not recognized connect it once again When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damag...

Page 1308: ...ace the ori ginal considering the reference placement position for the selected scan size For e xample when scanning an 8 1 2 x 11 A4 original using a 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 B5 setting on the document glass align the original using the document glass scale at t he left edge to fit the area you wish to scan into the 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 B5 scannin g area DOCUMENT GLASS When the background color of the job status d...

Page 1309: ... the original with either bl ack or white This is suitable for text only originals however for originals that con tain illustrations it is best to use the Start key with the color mode set to Grays cale or set the color mode of the Start key to Full Color or Auto Graysc ale and then scan Is a destination included that h as TIFF S sel ected for the fo rmat If you wish to send an image scanned at hi...

Page 1310: ...Place the original again in the correct orientation and resend When using the document glass the original must be placed face down When using the automatic document feeder the original must be placed face up When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage th...

Page 1311: ... sep arately When destinations for E mail FTP Desktop and Network Folder and Inter net fax destinations are included in a broadcast transmission the original transmis sion orientation of Internet fax takes precedence and thus the file may not appea r in the correct orientation when viewed on a PC When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is no...

Page 1312: ...t Mono2 i n color mode Change the color mode to Full Color or Grayscale and then ta p the Start key When JPEG is selected for the file type and the image is scanned in Mo no2 the file will be created as a TIFF file When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may da...

Page 1313: ...a dministrator If the key is an individual key is the key included in a group Remove the key from the group and then edit or delete the ke y If the key is included in multiple groups it must be removed from all groups Call Program Delete in the action panel for each mode Is the key being used in a reserved transmission or a transmission in pr ogress Wait until the transmission is finished or cance...

Page 1314: ...st will show where i ndividual and group keys are stored Setting mode System Settings List Print User Send ing Address List Program List Have functions been disabled by the administrator Check with your administrator Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode Check with your administrator Has your administrator enable d a function that prevents edi ting deleting Check with your admi...

Page 1315: ...b Handling tab of t he printer driver Have functions been disabled b y the administrator Check with your administrator Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode When user authentication is enabled the functions that you can u se may be restricted in your user settings When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not...

Page 1316: ...r ator Check with your administrator Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode When user au thentication is enabled the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the har...

Page 1317: ...Get Folder Name button in the document filing sa ve screen of the printer driver to call up the custom folders that have been created on the machine Does the custom folder have a password Enter the password configured in the machine in the docum ent filing save screen When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the ...

Page 1318: ...rom being ea sily deleted Has automatic deletion of document filing files b een enabled If files that you need have been deleted consult the administrator of the machine When Automatic Deletion of File Settings is enabled in the setting mode the files in the specified folders are periodically deleted Even when the fil e property is Confidential or Protect the file may be deleted System Settings Do...

Page 1319: ... of the file set to Pr otect A file cannot be deleted when its property is set to Pro tect Change the file property from Protect to Sharing and then d elete the file When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being store...

Page 1320: ...ferent folder and then set its property to Confidenti al Confidential cannot be specified for a file in the Quick File folder Note that Pro tect can be specified for a file in the Quick File folder to prevent it from being ea sily deleted When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug th...

Page 1321: ...ution Did you enter the wron g password Check with your administrator If you cannot remember the password change the file or folder password t o a new password in the setting mode When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the da...

Page 1322: ...k Solution Does the name include characters that cannot be used in a file or folder name The following characters cannot be used i n a file or folder name When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or receiv...

Page 1323: ... check Solution Does the name include characters that cannot be used in a file or folder name The following characters cannot be used i n a file or folder name When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is not gray do not switch off the main power switch or unplug the power plug This may damage the hard drive or cause the data being stored or r...

Page 1324: ...ransmission settings before Quic k File or File settings were configured that name will be used for the stor ed file If the number of characters in the name exceeds the maximum nu mber of characters allowed for a Quick File name 30 characters charact ers after the 30th character will be discarded When the background color of the job status display at the upper right corner of the touch panel is no...

Page 1325: ...th your administrator Some functions may have been disabled in the setting mode When user au thentication is enabled the functions that you can use may be restricted in your user settings USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1325 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1326: ... fail thr ee times in a ro w After operation unlocks log in using the correct user information When A Warning when Login Fails is enabled in the setting mode and login fails 3 times in a row a warning will be displayed and user authentication operation will lo ck for 5 minutes If you do not know your user information contact your administ rator Setting mode User Control Default Settings A Warning ...

Page 1327: ...the Power button and the main powe r switch off and on several times it is likely that a failure has occurred that requir es service In this event stop using the machine unplug the power plug and cont act your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department When contacting your de aler or nearest SHARP Service Department inform them of the displayed error co de USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N ...

Page 1328: ...resume prin ting When the output tray becomes full a detector activate s and stops printing Is the toner collection container full Replace the toner collection container as instruc ted by the message in the touch panel REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION CONTAINE R Are restrictions placed on the trays that ca n be used in each mode copy print fax Int ernet fax and document filing Check the settings in ...

Page 1329: ... x 8 1 2 A5 size Select the original size manually Original sizes smaller than 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5 cannot be detected When sca nning a small original on the document glass it is convenient to place a blank sh eet of paper on top of the original which is the same size 8 1 2 x 11 A4 8 1 2 x 11 R B5 etc as the paper that you wish to use for printing USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http s...

Page 1330: ...out Pull out the bypass tray extension guide When loading paper in the bypass tray be sure to pull out the extension to e nable the paper size to be detected correctly USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1330 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1331: ... to Long Size Note that long originals cannot be copied using the copy functio n Is the original on thin paper Use the document glass to scan the original If you need to use the automatic document feeder use Slow Sc an Mode in Others to scan the original Is the feed roller dirty Clean the surface of the paper feed roller CLEANING OF THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC D OCUMENT FEEDER USER S MANUAL M...

Page 1332: ...per in a tray for a long time remove the pap er from the tray and store it in a bag in a dark and dry location Are the bypass tray guides a djusted to the width of the p aper Adjust the bypass tray guides to the width of the paper Is the bypass tray extension guide pulled out When loading large size paper pull out the extension guide Is the bypass feed roller dirty Clean the surface of the bypass ...

Page 1333: ...paper remaining in the bypass tray combine it with the paper to be added and reload as a si ngle stack If paper is added without removing the remaining paper a misfeed ma y result USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1333 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1334: ...ed in each mode copy print fax Int ernet fax and document filing Check the settings in Paper Tray Settings and see if checkmarks appear in the checkboxes of e ach mode Feeding Approved Job Functions without a checkmark cannot be used for pri nting using that tray Setting mode Paper Tray Settings Tray Reg istration Feeding Approved Job USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica shar...

Page 1335: ...n see SPECIFICATIONS in Quick Start G uide Are the paper tray or bypass tray guides adjusted to the width of th e paper Adjust the paper tray or bypass tray guides to the width o f the paper Are the original guides adjusted t o the width of the paper Adjust the original guides to the width of the paper USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manu...

Page 1336: ... functions been disabled by the administ rator Check with your administrator Some functions may have been disabled in the settin g mode USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1336 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1337: ... of the document gl ass or automatic document feeder CLEANING OF THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Is the bypass feed roller dirty Clean the surface of the bypass feed roller CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1337 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1338: ...u nched paper Take care that the image does not overlap the punch holes If the printed image overlaps the punch holes smudges may appear on t he reverse side of the paper following 1 sided printing or on both sides following 2 sided printing Does a message appear in dicating the need for maint enance Contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department as s oon as possible USER S MANUAL MX M365...

Page 1339: ...n the tray settings The image may disappear if rubbed Paper other than heavy paper is being used but heavy paper is selected in the tray settings This may cause creases and misfeeds Setting mode Paper Tray Settings Tray Registration Is the paper loaded s o that printing takes place on the reverse side Check the front and reverse side of paper Some types of paper such as labels and transparency fil...

Page 1340: ...ed be sure to check t he paper size setting Setting mode Paper Tray Settings Tray Registration Was the original placed in t he correct position If you are using the document glass be sure to place the origin al in the far left corner of the document glass DOCUMENT GLASS USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1340 of 1441 3 17 ...

Page 1341: ... print side facing up Bypass tray and tray 5 Load the paper with the print side facing down When the paper type is Pre Printed or Letter Head load the paper i n the opposite way Except when Disabling of Duplex is enabled in the setting mode administrator For information about the setting mode con sult your administrator USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portal...

Page 1342: ...the paper spe cified for the cover or insert If the paper type set for the cover or insert is not the same as the paper ty pe set for the tray paper will be fed from a different tray Setting mode Paper Tray Settings Tray Registration USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1342 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1343: ...e with the machine cannot be used Is the connected USB device re cognized correctly Use USB Device Check in the setting mode to check wh ether or not the device is recognized Setting mode System Settings USB Device Check If it is not recognized connect it once again USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1343 of 1441 3 17 2016...

Page 1344: ...device If the format of the USB memory device is other than FAT 32 use your PC to change the format to FAT32 Are you using a USB memory device wit h a capacity of more than 32 GB Use a 32 GB or less USB memory device USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1344 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1345: ...el The finisher is in trouble xx xx Letters and number s appear in xx xx Check the cable connection of the fi nisher Remove and then firmly reinsert the cabl e and restart the machine Have functions been disabled by the administrator Check with your administrator Some functions may have been disabled i n the setting mode USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com porta...

Page 1346: ...Quick Start Guide Is a paper size that cannot b e stapled included in the pri nt job For the paper size that can be stapled see SPECIFICATIONS in Quick Start Guide Is the paper type setting of t he tray selected in the print er driver set to a paper type that cannot be stapled Check the paper type settings in the machine and select a tray that h as paper that can be used for stapling Click the Det...

Page 1347: ...ected in t he printer driver set to a paper type that canno t be punched Check the paper type settings in the machine and select a tray that has p aper that can be used for punching Click the Details button in Paper S election on the Paper Select tab of the printer properties window and c heck the paper type setting of each tray Punching is not possible on labels tab paper glossy paper transparen ...

Page 1348: ... position set correctly Check the stapling position in PREVIEW SCREEN Are the punching positions set correctly Check the punch position in PREVIEW SCREEN USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1348 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1349: ...isabling of Duplex Are you using a paper type that h as a specific front and reverse sid e The folding function cannot be used with pre printed paper lett erhead paper or other paper that has specific front or reverse s ides When folding paper use a paper type such as plain paper that do es not have specific front or reverse sides USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa...

Page 1350: ...o check Solution Is the printed output curl ed Curled output may be solved when the paper is loaded upside down into the tray USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1350 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1351: ...eck Solution Is the output curled Curled output may be solved when the paper is loaded upside down into the tr ay USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1351 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1352: ...ave the output sheet s got folded If the front and back side of the sheets in the paper feed tray have been re versed in some cases it can be improved USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1352 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1353: ...heet s got folded If the front and back side of the sheets in the paper feed tray have been re versed in some cases it can be improved USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1353 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1354: ... check Solution Are there a number of jobs waiting to be execu ted Wait until several of the jobs have been exec uted USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1354 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1355: ...ck Solution Is the brightness properly adjust ed Tap the LCD Control key on the home screen to adjust the brig htness USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1355 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1356: ... be automatical ly logged out if Auto Clear activates If you are the administrator change the time setting of Auto Clear or disable Aut o Clear in Auto Clear Setting Setting mode Operation Settings Job Detail Settings Auto Clear Setting USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1356 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1357: ...aler or nearest SHARP Service Department For the factory default administrator password see TO THE ADMINI STRATOR OF THE MACHINE in Quick Start Guide After changing t he password take special care to remember it USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1357 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1358: ...ect desired items Contents Search Index Functions A target function can be displayed using the Contents Search or Index function Display from Contents Clicking the CONTENTS tab displays a list of contents of the User s Manual Click the item you want to see Click a tab of the mode you want to see Tap the item that you want to see from the menu on the left of the screen USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M46...

Page 1359: ...rched then click the SEARCH button to display the search result screen Click the item you want to see USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1359 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1360: ...Clicking the INDEX tab displays the index screen Click the item you want to see USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1360 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1361: ...mage to properties This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of machine damage or failure This supplements function or operation procedure This explains a restriction of function or operation procedure This explains how to stop or correct an operation USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1361 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 1...

Page 1362: ... procedures based on Windows 7 The screens may vary depending on the version of the operating system or the software application The User s Manual provides the explanations of screens and procedures based on Mac OS X 10 4 in the case of a Mac OS X The screens may vary depending on the version of the operating system or the software application Wherever MX xxxx appears in the User s Manual please s...

Page 1363: ...e peripheral devices are generally optional However some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment In general the explanations provided in the User s Manual are based on the assumption that the large capacity tray saddle finisher 50 sheet stapling and punch module have been installed on the MX M365N However some descriptions assumes an installation of peripheral devices diffe...

Page 1364: ...he IP address of the machine Recommended Web browser Internet Explorer 6 or later Firefox 3 6 or later Safari 4 0 or later Depending on the machine settings user authentication may be required to display the setting mode Web version For password and other information required for user authentication contact the machine administrator Click Operation Manual Download on the menu Select the language y...

Page 1365: ...Open the User s Manual folder Double click index htm Depending on your Web browser a warning message may appear in the information bar or dialog box to indicate that your Web browser has restricted viewing of this file to help protect security In this case release the restricted viewing of your Web browser The User s Manual is not properly displayed unless you release the restriction For more info...

Page 1366: ...ROLLER When lines appear CLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF THE PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUM Do not use a flammable spray to clean the machine If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical components or the fusing unit inside the machine fire or electrical shock may result Do not use thinner benzene or similar volatile cleaning agents to clean the machine These may degrade or discolor the housing U...

Page 1367: ...arts Keep these parts clean at all times When using the document glass the document glass the document backplate sheet When using the automatic document feeder the scanning area Examples of lines in the image USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1367 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1368: ...ng If necessary moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent After that wipe with a clean dry cloth USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1368 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1369: ... wiping If necessary moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent After that wipe with a clean dry cloth USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1369 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1370: ... cleaner Clean the document scanning area on the document glass with the glass cleaner One scanning area is on the document glass and the other is inside the automatic document feeder Open the scanning area cover on the automatic document feeder Push in the release switch to release the cover USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M36...

Page 1371: ...area in the automatic document feeder Close the cover Replace the glass cleaner USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1371 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1372: ... Release the toner collection container Press up the toner collection container release lever If cleaning the main charger of the photoconductive drum does not solve the problem pull the knob out and push it back three more times When pulling and pushing the knob to clean the charger pull and push the knob slowly from one end to the other USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica ...

Page 1373: ... will go Clean the main charger Gently pull the charger cleaner all the way up and gently push it in Push the toner collection container into the machine Push the container in until it clicks into place USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1373 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1374: ...Close the front cover USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1374 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1375: ...pes or heavy paper through the bypass tray wipe the surface of the feed roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1375 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1376: ...rtridge for replacement When the amount of toner decreases further the message Ready to scan for copy Change the toner cartridge appears When this message appears replace the toner cartridge When the toner runs out printing is stopped and the message Change the toner cartridge appears If you continue to use the machine without replacing the cartridge the following message will appear Once the mach...

Page 1377: ... Be sure to use a SHARP recommended toner cartridge Depending on your conditions of use the color may become light or the image blurred Keep used toner cartridges in a plastic bag do not discard them Your service technician will collect used toner cartridges To view the approximate amount of toner remaining indicated in hold down the Home Screen button during printing or in standby mode When toner...

Page 1378: ...oner may spill out Hold the toner cartridge with both hands as shown and slowly pull it out of the machine Take out a new toner cartridge from its package and shake it five or six times USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1378 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1379: ...he toner cartridge is replaced the machine automatically enters image adjustment mode Do not open the front cover while this is occurring A toner cartridge of a different color cannot be installed Be sure to install a toner cartridge of the same color USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1379 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1380: ...USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1380 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1381: ... collection container Press up the toner collection container release lever The toner collection container will fall forward as shown below Wait until the container comes to a stop Do not throw the toner collection container into a fire Toner may fly and cause burns Store the toner collection container out of the reach of small children USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sh...

Page 1382: ...e a sheet of paper such as newspaper on the surface before placing the toner collection container Remote the cover that is attached to the side of the toner collection box Do not point the holes down as used toner will spill out USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1382 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1383: ...ction you removed it in Push the toner collection container into the machine Push the container in until it clicks into place Remove carefully taking care that toner does not spill When attaching the cover take care that your clothes are not soiled by toner USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1383 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1384: ...Close the front cover USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1384 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1385: ...Operation Open the automatic document feeder Remove the document backplate sheet from the automatic document feeder Remove the sheet slowly Place the removed sheet with the side that was attached face up on the document glass Grasp the tab on the stamp unit and pull the unit out USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1385 of 1...

Page 1386: ...e automatic document feeder to attach the document backplate sheet When the automatic document feeder is closed the document backplate sheet on the document glass attaches to the automatic document feeder USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1386 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1387: ...automatic document feeder If the document backplate sheet is not firmly attached remove the sheet and then close the automatic document feeder again to firmly attach the sheet USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1387 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1388: ...The job ID used i n the OSA is rec orded It is recor ded regardless of whether or not t he OSA is prese nt 4 Computer Name The name of the computer that s To make it easy to total the usage counts of differently configured machines the items recorded in the job log are fixed regardless of what peripheral devices are installed or the objective of the recording In some cases job information may not ...

Page 1389: ...cor ded 8 Number of Card Issuance The number of ti mes the card ha s been issued is written in an SS FC IC card is rec orded 9 Billing Code Main Code Sub Code or Use Co de is recorded 10 Starting Date Time The date and tim e the job was st arted are record ed 11 Completing Date Time The date and tim e the job was co mpleted are reco rded USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica s...

Page 1390: ...Counts by origin al paper size in color mode and b lack white mod e are recorded 14 Number of sheets according to size Number of sheet s according to p aper size is reco rded 15 Number of Reserved Sets Number of specif ied sets or reser ved destinations is recorded 16 Number of Completed Sets Number of compl eted sets or num ber of destinatio ns to which tran smission was su ccessfully compl USER ...

Page 1391: ... b the cause of t he error is recor ded 21 Print Job Related Item Output The output mode of a printed job i s recorded 22 Staple The status of st apling is recorde d 23 Staple Count The staple count is recorded 24 Punch Count The punch coun t is recorded 25 Fold A job that uses t he fold function i s recorded 26 Fold Count Number of folded pages is recorde d USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565...

Page 1392: ...ge se nd job is recorde d 32 Administrative Serial Number Administrative se rial number of an image send job is recorded 33 Broadcast number Broadcast numb er of an image s end job is record ed 34 Entry Order Reservation orde r for broadcast tr ansmission of an image send job is recorded This is used to link com munication and p rinting when rec ording multi pollin g jobs USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX...

Page 1393: ...ument Filing Related Item Document Filing Status of docum ent filing is recor ded 40 Storing Mode Document filing storing mode is r ecorded 41 Common Functionality Color Setting Color mode sele cted by user is r ecorded 42 Special Modes Special modes s elected when th e job was execut ed is recorded 43 File Name The stored file n ame is recorded 44 Data Size KB The size of a file USER S MANUAL MX ...

Page 1394: ...ed original sheet s is recorded 48 Paper Size For a print job t he paper size is r ecorded For a s end job the tran smitted paper siz e is recorded Fo r a Scan to HDD job the paper siz e of the stored fi le is recorded 49 Paper Type The paper type u sed for printing i s recorded 50 Paper Property The paper proper ty specified in Paper Type is r ecorded USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER...

Page 1395: ...erial Number The serial numbe r of the machine is recorded 55 Name The name of the machine that is s et in the Web pa ges is recorded 56 Machine Location The installation l ocation of the m achine that is se t in the Web pag es is recorded USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1395 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1396: ...ent and inform the following items An optional field service is also available Product name Digital multifunctional system Model MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N Problem status Enter as in de tails as possible Do not try to repair it by yourself It is very dangerous USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1396 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 ...

Page 1397: ... cartridge needs to be taken out Please contact your dealer or SHARP Service Department in your area before you change your place of residence USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1397 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1398: ...will appear on the touch panel When the message is displayed contact your dealer or SHARP Service Department in your area as soon as possible USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1398 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1399: ...nce and functions of this product the Counter Service System and the Spot Service System For service system details contact the dealer and select the most appropriate service USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1399 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1400: ...etain performance parts for this product for seven 7 years after production is discontinued Performance parts refers to parts that are required to maintain the functions of this product USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1400 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1401: ...verview We will retain supplies of this product for seven 7 years after it has been discontinued USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1401 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1402: ...ware components GPL and LGPL include similar requirements For information on obtaining the source code for the open source software and for obtaining the GPL LGPL and other license agreement information visit the following website http sharp world com products copier source download index html We are unable to answer any questions about the source code for the open source software The source code ...

Page 1403: ... the name of M I T not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Furthermore if you modify this software you must label your software as modified software and not distribute it in such a fashion that it might be confused with the original MIT software M I T makes no representations about the suitability of this software...

Page 1404: ...opyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 1 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 2 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product i...

Page 1405: ...ly to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA lhash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young shou...

Page 1406: ...yright c 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 by Richard Outerbridge GEnie OUTER CIS 71755 204 Graven Imagery 1992 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for ...

Page 1407: ...now their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its ...

Page 1408: ... or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or ...

Page 1409: ... used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany...

Page 1410: ...te or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed ...

Page 1411: ...es a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts ...

Page 1412: ...the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does Copyright C year name of author This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it ...

Page 1413: ... April 1989 Ty Coon President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Ve...

Page 1414: ...er code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute...

Page 1415: ...ree library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operat...

Page 1416: ...uch a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously an...

Page 1417: ...ibrary the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or c...

Page 1418: ...e it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether th...

Page 1419: ...Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with ...

Page 1420: ... rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or ...

Page 1421: ...the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates th...

Page 1422: ...TAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These...

Page 1423: ...License along with this library if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the library if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc h...

Page 1424: ... cause burns Further do not forcibly open a toner cartridge Toner dusts may leak In this case avoid dust inhilation or skin contact Storage Store toner or toner cartridge in a cool and dark place that is not sealed or containing flame Store toner or toner cartridge out of reach of small children Store a new toner cartridge box horizontally not setting upvertically being careful not to invertrevers...

Page 1425: ...paper in a bag and store it on a flat place If you do not put paper in a bag or you set up paper for storage curling or moisture absorption occurs resulting in a paper jam Be sure to put the rest of paper in a bag and close the top of the bag for storage otherwise paper curling or moisture absorption occurs resulting in a paper jam Caution Do not store a toner cartridge in a place in which the tem...

Page 1426: ...wn in this manual We thank you for your co operation in recycling used cartridges Sharp collects used cartridges to help preserve the Earth s environment and the effective use of of its resources promoting the recycling of them Please give the used cartridges to your maintenance staff Collecting and Recycling Used Photoconductive Drums or Photoconductive Drum Cartridges Sharp offers a material rec...

Page 1427: ...in the U S A and other countries PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company IBM PC AT and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation NEC PC 9821 and PC98 NX are registered trademarks or trademarks of NEC Corporation Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation Sharp OSA is a trademark of Sharp Corporation RealVNC is a trademark of RealVNC Limited All o...

Page 1428: ...n certain jurisdictions Hoefler Text is a trademark of Johnathan Hoefler and may be registered in some jurisdictions HGGothicB HGMinchoL HGPGothicB and HGPMinchoL are trademarks of Ricoh Company Ltd and may be registered in some jurisdictions ITC is a trademark of International Typeface Corporation registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdi...

Page 1429: ...trictions The Software contains copyrighted material trade secrets and other proprietary material whic h is owned by SHARP and or its Licensors and in order to protect them you may not decompi le reverse engineer disassemble or otherwise reduce the Software to a human perceivable fo rm You may not modify network rent lease loan distribute or create derivative works based upon the Software in whole...

Page 1430: ...RANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGAR DING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUM ENTATION IN TERMS OF THEIR CORRECTNESS ACCURACY RELIABILITY OR OTHERWI SE NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SHARP OR A SHARP AU THORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU A ND NO...

Page 1431: ...rosoft Windows this licens e shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the state of California an d Washington respectively If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provis ion of this License or portion thereof to be unenforceable that provision of the License shall be enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to effect the intent of the parties ...

Page 1432: ...al multifunctional system MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N PRINTING ALL CATEGORIES USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1432 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1433: ...onal system MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N PRINTING OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1433 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1434: ...l multifunctional system MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N PRINTING COPY USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1434 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1435: ... multifunctional system MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N PRINTING PRINTER USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1435 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1436: ...al multifunctional system MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N PRINTING FAX USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1436 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1437: ...ultifunctional system MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N PRINTING IMAGE SEND USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1437 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1438: ...tifunctional system MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N PRINTING DOCUMENT FILING USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1438 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1439: ...ltifunctional system MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N PRINTING SETTING MODE USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1439 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1440: ...tifunctional system MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N PRINTING TROUBLESHOOTING USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1440 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Page 1441: ... 009 htm Digital multifunctional system MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N PRINTING APPENDIX USER S MANUAL MX M365N MX M465N MX M565N USER S http siica sharpusa com portals 0 downloads Manuals MX M365N M 1441 of 1441 3 17 2016 7 14 AM ...

Reviews:

No comments